2015 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual
Contents
1.2.
3.
4. 8 4 ON
5. VIN
6. 235 65R17 S SAE Snow M S
7. BeltAlert 5 8 BeltAlert 5 8
8. Sunrider
9. Tip n Slide
10. SENTRY KEY
11. Uconnect
12. SUNRIDER Sunrider Sunrider SUNRIDER Sunrider
13. Uconnect Uconnect EDR
14. CHMSL 3 6 OBD II
15. Chrysler Group LLC
16. N N
17. LOCK Recirculation LED
18. FREEDOM TOP Freedom Top
19. OAT MS 12106 150000 240000 MS 12106 OAT OAT Chrysler MS 12106 150000 10 MOPAR OAT MS 12106 Chrysler OAT Chrysler MS 12106 50 70 34 37
20. 1 8 9 DVD 24 72 41 5
21. RKE MOPAR
22. MUSIC TYPE MUSIC TYPE USB iPod iPod USB USB iPod USB iPod BTSA Bluetooth Uconnect phone Uconnect Radio Bluetooth BTSA BTSA VR AUX Bluetooth Streaming Audio Bluetooth Play BTSA Uconnect phone Uconnect phone
23. 120 75 120 75 80 50 96 14 75 120
24. 900 1500 2 3 CO CO 4
25. Sentry Key
26. TPMS TPMS ABS TCS BAS
27. Wrangler OPERATING INFORMATION 2 0 1 5 Wrangler 15JK72 126 ARA AA 15JK72 126 ARA AA
28. ORC OFF OFF ON RUN START OFF ORC ORC START ON RUN ACC OFF ORC ORC ON RUN ORC
29. LOCK NEUTRAL PARK NEUTRAL PARK NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
30. LOW HIGH OFF HI LO OFF 30 30 Tip n Slide
31. 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
32. MOPAR Super Kleen MOPAR MOPAR 1200 8274 A B C 20 25 15 34
33. 15 15 10 15 Keyless Enter N Go ON RUN ACC NEUTRA 4L
34. TPMS RKE ATC ABS
35. 4L
36. EVIC EVIC GSI Oil Change Required EVIC ECO DTE 5 Torx Torx 40 6
37. RKE LATCH LATCH ALR
38. RKE EVIC 45 LOCK EVIC 10 LOCK EVIC
39. ALR 1 12 6 30 15 2 180 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
40. 17 ATF 4 ATF 4 MOPAR ATF 4 MOPAR Chrysler MS 9224 MOPAR ATF 4 MOPAR SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 44 RBI 226 SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 MOPAR MOPAR Trac Lok SAE 75W 140 SAE J1703 MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 DOT 3 DOT 4 MO
41. 1 2 4L OFF SWAY BAR SWAY BAR 29 18 18 29 22 14 4H 4L SWAY BAR 4L 4H 4H 4L 2 5 3 N 3 5 3 3 2 N
42. 12 20 M36 1 M6 2 20 20 M7 3 ON ACC 160 13 12 160 13 SET 1
43. GVWR GAWR 60 10 GTW 805 500 500 805 80 50 GAWR GCWR
44. 300 500 60 100 55 50 90 80 7 8 9 1 25 4 LATCH 1 2 3
45. ALR ALR 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 ALR ALR ALR ALR ALR 4 5 6 7 1
46. 2 13 24 35 46 5 3 6 15 24 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 10 16 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 AutoStick AutoStick AutoStick 4L AutoStick D AutoStick
47. ESP TPMS Autostick
48. 18 1 10 16 0 1 2 3 75 165
49. Panel Bi Level CD DVD CD DVD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Uconnect Bluetooth BTSA
50. 6 7 LOCK 1 2 T50 Torx 3 4 5 3 4 5 1 2 3
51. 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 MOPAR 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 API API API SAE MOPAR 5W 20 Shell Helix Pennzoil
52. RKE LOCK 1 ON RUN 3 ACC 2 START 4 SRS RKE
53. MOPAR MOPAR MOPAR 1 2
54. VIN VIN VIN MOPAR MOPAR Chrysler 2014 International
55. 38 5 85 135 100 1 2 20 19 Chrysler 25 40 OFF NEUTRAL H
56. ESC ESC ESC HSA PARK HSA EVIC EVIC HSA HSA 1 PARK NEUTRAL 2 3 180 ESC Off 4 20 360 5 180 OFF 6 ON
57. NEUTRAL DRIVE 4L 8 5 5 3 30 76 5 8
58. 12 DVD
59. 6 M S MS M S M amp S 40 5 1 1 6
60. 10 ON UNLOCK RKE 1 1 6 OFF AUTO 90 LOCK AUTO
61. PARK 9 NEUTRAL 10 11 12 13 14 15 3 NEUTRAL 4 N 5 6 REVERSE 7 8 8 7 9 DRIVE 10 ACC 11 PARK 12 NEUTRAL PARK NEUTRAL NEUTRAL OFF PARK 13 14 15 N 1 2 3 LOCK 4 ON RUN 5 6 NEUTRAL 7 8 N NEUTRAL PAR
62. J1 J2 30 J3 J4 25 J5 25 J6 40 ABS 1 MOPAR Jeep 2 3 4 5 MOPAR MOPAR MOPAR 6
63. 12 CO CO
64. 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 MP3 USB iPod USB iPod USB iPod Play Browse List BTSA Bluetooth CD DVD ATC
65. REVERSE 4L NEUTRAL REVERSE REVERSE 15 10
66. WWFC 3 MTBE 10 10 E 85 10 TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS 20 TPM 24 15 TPMS 75 EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
67. EDR EDR EDR EDR 30 EDR EDR EDR EDR EDR EDR EDR 12 8 4 ON RUN 8 4 ORC
68. ABS ESP ABS 1 ON RUN 2 ON RUN 3 4 2 7 6 5 75 120 6 7 ON RUN
69. 10 50 PARK 8 9 16 3 4 76 180 82 15 25 1 2 3 4 5 PARK 6
70. Floor Mix Defrost Defrost Mix A C Panel Bi Level LOCK O
71. 3 4L 4L 40 4L 25 4L Sway Bar 29 29 18 18
72. The combined weight of 1 occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg XXX XXX 2 XXX 3 XXX 4 1400 635 XXX 150 68 68 5 650 295 635 750 340 150 295 750 340 1400 650 5 4 865 392 1 2 3 4 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
73. 50 OAT MS 12106
74. 5 6 3 Freedom Top Freedom Top Freedom Top Velcro Freedom Top Velcro 1 2 L 3 L 4 8 9 10 11
75. OBD II MIL MIL gASCAP MIL MIL MOPAR MOPAR 3 6 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6
76. 12 BeltAlert BeltAlert BeltAlert START ON RUN SRS 12 1 2 12
77. TSC iPod USB MP3 Bluetooth ATC UCI UCI
78. 45 45 45 4L DRIVE 4L 103 15
79. 16 10 NEUTRAL 8 9 12 1012 1110 12 139 12 7 5 DRIVE DRIVE AutoStick 45 1 2 34 2 1 8 4 5 6 7 13
80. 1 2 Torx 88 10 22 2 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 90 2 3 1 2 Torx 3 40 Torx Torx 4 40 Torx 5
81. BAS ABS BAS BAS BAS BAS HSA HSA HSA HSA 12 20 12 20 40 25 ABS ABS
82. HOAT OAT OAT MS 12106 OAT MS 12106 OAT OAT HOAT OAT OAT MS 12106
83. 351 1 2 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 4 ROLLOVER WARNING 4 IMPORTANT NOTICE 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 8 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 3 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe con ditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual and all the Supplements B
84. ON 1 PARK NEUTRAL LOCK 2 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 25 40 5 1 2 3 4
85. LOCK ACC PARK PARK ON RUN SENTRY KEY SENTRY KEY PARK 1 ACC 2 3 LOCK 4 PARK
86. Uconnect Uconnect Phone Uconnect Uconnect phone Sentry Key Autostick
87. BTSI PARK PARK ON RUN PARK PARK DRIVE NEUTRAL DRIVE REVERSE PARK PARK REVERSE DRIVE NEUTRAL AutoStick AutoStick Drive 3 2 1 PARK REVERSE DRIVE NEUTRAL PARK PARK NEUTRAL
88. ABS TCS TCS BLD ABS TCS HSA BAS
89. MOPAR MOPAR MOPAR MOPAR MOPAR Total Clean MOPAR MOPAR Armor All MOPAR
90. Latch Latch LATCH 29 5 65 LATCH 29 5 65 LATCH 29 5 65 LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH Latch 2 Latch 2 X LATCH LATCH
91. LOCK 5 10 11 Torx Torx 40 12 13 1 2 4 Velcro 3 13 13 4 3 4 5 Uconnect Phone Velcro 6 13 7 13 13 8 Velcro 9 10
92. 30 48 30 48 30 3 4 DRIVE REVERSE REVERSE ESC Off Partial ESC
93. 10 AUTO EVIC EVIC
94. 6 Sunrider 1 2 3 4 5 Sunrider SUNRIDER 64 40 Sunrider Sunrider 1 2 3 SUNRIDER 64 40 Sunrider Sunrider 1 2 3 Sunrider 4 Sunrider Sunrider 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 14 Velcro 15
95. Help Help Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Cancel Cancel Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone
96. MIL MMT MMT MMT MMT MMT MMT MMT MMT CO
97. ESC Partial Off ESC OFF ESC ESC Partial Off ESC ESC OFF ESC Partial Off ESC TCS TCS ESC Partial Off TCS ESC ESC Partial Off ESC Full Off ESC OFF 5 ESC Full Off ESC ESC ESC ESC Full Off ESC ESC ESC ESC 4H
98. 10 16 1 2 13 13 4 W 5 6 Velcro Sunrider
99. H
100. 2 Freedom Top 3 Torx T30 4 5 Torx T30 6 Freedom Top 1 1 90 2 3 1
101. REVERSE NEUTRAL REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE COMMAND TRAC I ROCK TRAC 2H 4H N 4L
102. UNLOCK RKE Sentry Key ON RUN 10 Sentry Key SENTRY KEY Sentry Keys PIN PIN Sentry Key Immobilizer Sentry Key 433 92 Sentry Key
103. 1000 454 750 1654 454 1000 13 PARK NEUTRAL GVWR 1 GTW 2 GAWR 3 4
104. 12 FREEDOM TOP 1 2 Freedom Top 3 4 5 6 10 0 7 5 6 10 0 7 8 9 Freedom Top 6
105. 125 Door Frame Removal 125 Door Frame Installation Two Door Models If Equipped 126 Door Frame Installation Four Door Models If Equipped 127 SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS 128 Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top 130 Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 132 Lowering The Soft Top 134 Raising The Soft Top 139 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS 144 Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 145 Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 147 Folding Down The Soft Top 150 Putting Up The Soft Top 156 60 SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS 160 Opening The Sunrider 161 Closing The Sunrider 162 SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS 162 Opening The Sunrider 162
106. 4L PARK NEUTRAL START 10 LOCK OFF 15 10 MMT
107. PARK ON RUN 26 HDC HDC HDC 30 48 HDC CRUISE 27 28 TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS
108. 1 2 11 4 7 6 4 12 Velcro 2 5 13 6 Sunrider 7 8 9 10 21 Velcro 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 17 18 19 20 12
109. 5 6 7 1 2 3 PARK 4 REVERSE LOCK 5 6 PARK REVERSE
110. GAWR gASCAP gASCAP MIL GVWR GVWR GVWR GTW GTW GTW GCWR GCWR GAWR GAWR 1 2 3 4
111. ORC SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB ORC SAB
112. Panel Bi Level Panel OAT 50 50 Chrysler MS 12106 AUTO AUTO Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost
113. 1 1 6 TPMS 4 30 15 24 3 35 241 68 20 207 30 20 7 26 179 207 30 0 8 30 48 48 30
114. 30 30 48 48 30 30 S T T145 80D18 103M S T 50 80
115. 12 12
116. 41 5 15 16 17 18 3 19 12 Velcro 13 14 1 2 9 7 6 3 10 Velcro 2 5 11 4 2 Sunrider 5 Sunrider
117. ON RUN ACC PARK PARK 1 2 3 ACC 4 ON RUN 5 6 NEUTRAL 7 8 NEUTRAL 9 6 6
118. 2 1 1 2 3 60 40 1 2 3 4
119. 65 29 5 X X 65 29 5 X 65 29 5 X X 65 29 5 X LATCH 5 1 2 3 4 5
120. 1 16 2 V 1 2
121. 14 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 15 Rearming Of The System 15 To Arm The System 15 To Disarm The System 15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 16 9 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED 16 To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 16 Remote Key Unlock On First Press 16 To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 17 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 17 Transmitter Battery Replacement 18 General Information 18 DOORS 18 Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped 18 Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 19 Front Door Removal 19 Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 20 DOOR LOCKS 22 Manual Door
122. PIN Uconnect Phone 1 7 1 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Ready Dial 151 1234 5555 Uconnect Phone Ready Call Ready Uconnect Uconnect Uconnect Phone New Entry Phonebook Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Voice eh ah I would like to make a phone call to Kelly Smith Who do you want to call
123. Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Mute Uconnect Phone Mute off Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Transfer Call Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Ready Setup Phone Pairing List Phones Uconnect Phone Select Delete Uconnect Phone Send Uconnect Send Uconnect Phone Would you like to pair a phone clear a
124. 341 FLUID CAPACITIES 341 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS 342 Engine 342 Chassis 343 304 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Battery 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Under Engine Cover 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Engine Oil Fill 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir 305 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emis sions engine and automatic transmission con trol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
125. 60 40 Uconnect PHONE Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect
126. D DRIVE AutoStick AutoStick REVERSE PARK NEUTRAL MIL PARK NEUTRAL PARK PARK PARK LOCK OF
127. Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone 32 Uconnect Phone 32 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Ready Phonebook Edit Phonebook Edit Phonebook Edit Uconnect Ready Phonebook Delete Phonebook Delete List Names Uconnect Phone Delete
128. 249 Tire Markings 249 Tire Identification Number TIN 252 Tire Terminology And Definitions 253 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 254 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 257 Tire Pressure 257 Tire Inflation Pressures 258 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 258 Radial Ply Tires 259 Tire Types 259 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 260 Spare Tires If Equipped 260 Tire Spinning 262 Tread Wear Indicators 262 Life Of Tire 262 Replacement Tires 263 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 264 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 264 211 TIRE PRESSURE MONI
129. Tip n Slide Tip n Slide Tip n Slide 1 Radio Player 2 Phone Navigation More Climate Setti
130. 4L 4H ESC On 4H ESC ESC Partial Off ESC OFF ESC Partial Off ESC TCS TCS ESC ESC ESC OFF ESC On ERM ERM ERM ERM ERM Full Off ESC ESC ERM ERM ESC ESC
131. Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Send 3746 PIN Send 3 7 4 6 3746 Uconnect Phone OFF OFF 1 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone OFF 2 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone 3 OFF Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Ready Uconnect Phone 32 Uconnect Ready Emergency Uconnect Phone 112 Uconnect Phone
132. 3 6 3 21 3 73 2205 1000 110 50 3 21 3 73 4 10 2205 1000 110 50 3 6 3 21 2205 1000 110 50 3 73 4 10 4409 2000 220 100 3 21 2205 1000 110 50 3 73 4409 2000 220 100 4 10 4409 2000 220 100 220 100 10 62 100 GAWR GAWR TW 10
133. 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Mopar 1 2 5 6 HVAC
134. ABS OFF ON RUN ON RUN 11 ABS 12 13 8 4 ON RUN 14 8 1 1 6 9 10
135. Pair A Phone Uconnect Phone Ready Setup Confirmations Prompts On Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Emergency Setup Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Ready Breakdown service Setup Breakdown Service Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone
136. 4L 29 20 Autostick 5
137. DRIVE 4L 3 2 5 3 4L 3 2 5 3 TRAC LOK RUBICON AXLE LOCK 4L 16 10 AXLE LOCK AXLE LOCK 4WD 2H 4H 4H 4H N 4L 4L 25 40 25 40 4L
138. 307 Filter 308 Identification Logo 307 Pressure Warning Light 174 Recommendation 341 Viscosity 308 341 Onboard Diagnostic System 306 Operating Precautions 306 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 62 Overdrive 220 Overdrive OFF Switch 220 Overheating Engine 177 289 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Care 328 Parking Brake 237 Personal Settings 192 Pets 53 Pets Transporting 53 Phone Uconnect 67 Phone Cellular 64 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 64 Placard Tire and Loading Information 254 Power Brakes 239 Door Locks 23 Mirrors 63 Steering 236 237 Windows 25 Power Steering Fluid 343 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 33 Preparation for Jacking
139. 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 21 J13 Ignition Off Draw PDC IOD PDC 5 658 906 1 194 2 912 W16W 2
140. 38 55 175 Alarm 176 Anti Lock 175 Anti Lock Warning 175 Automatic Headlights 101 Back Up 340 Brake Assist Warning 247 Brake Warning 174 239 Bulb Replacement 338 Cargo 104 Center Mounted Stop 340 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 175 Cruise 179 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 180 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 180 Exterior 56 Fog 102 340 Hazard Warning Flasher 289 Headlight Leveling 104 Headlight Switch 101 Headlights 339 Headlights On With Wipers 102 High Beam 102 175 High Beam Indicator 175 High Beam Low Beam Select 102 Hill Descent Control Indicator 248 Illuminated Entry 16 Instrument Cluster 101 Interior 103 Lights On Reminder 102 Low Fuel 173 Oil Pressure
141. HSA ERM ESC ESC ESC TSC HDC TIN ROCK TRAC COMMAND TRAC I RUBICON TRAC LOK
142. Off ESC Off ESC On DRIVE REVERSE 15 24 3 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 12
143. SAE 5W 30 Chrysler MOPAR MS 6395 Shell Helix Pennzoil SAE 5W 20 MOPAR API Chrysler ACEA A1 B1 MS 6395 OBD II OBD II
144. 1 SET 1 1 12 13 SET CANCEL ON OFF OFF RES 20 32 RES RES 1 1 SET 1 1
145. 173 Untwisting Procedure 32 Seats 93 Adjustment 93 Easy Entry 94 Fold and Tumble Rear 97 Heated 96 Height Adjustment 94 Rear Folding 99 Removal 98 Seatback Release 94 Tilting 94 Security Alarm 15 Security System 15 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Sentry Key Programming 14 Service Assistance 348 Settings Personal 192 Shift Lever Override 300 Shifting 215 Automatic Transmission 215 Manual Transmission 221 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 284 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 285 Shoulder Belts 29 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 206 Signals Turn 56 102 173 339 340 358 Snow Chains Tire Chains 264 Snow Tires 259 Soft Top
146. EVIC ECO ON GSI GSI GSI GSI GSI GSI EVIC Oil Change Required Oil Change Required 5 EVIC ON MENU ON 1 2 10 LOCK 3 EVIC MENU ECO EVIC EVIC Low Tire Pressure Low Fuel Service TPM System
147. 1 PARK 2 LOCK OFF 3 10 4 5 6 Overdrive DRIVE Autostick AutoStick AutoStick DRIVE AutoStick DRIVE AutoStick AutoStick AutoStick R REVERSE N PARK NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
148. EVIC CD
149. ORC SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB ORC SAB SAB SRS S
150. Premium TPM System Graphic Display Damaged Key Key In Ignition Turn Signal On Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out Key Fob Battery Low Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion Door Ajar Gate Ajar Check Gascap Oil Change Required ECO ECO Door Ajar MENU MENU EVIC EVIC MENU COMPASS
151. 128 144 Sound Systems 193 Sound Systems Radio 193 Spare Tire 260 261 291 Speed Control Cruise Control 107 Speedometer 173 Starting 213 Automatic Transmission 213 Cold Weather 215 Engine Block Heater 215 Engine Fails to Start 214 Manual Transmission 213 Steering Power 236 237 Tilt Column 107 Wheel Lock 13 Wheel Tilt 107 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 197 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 197 Storage 338 Storage Behind the Seat 113 Storage Vehicle 206 338 Storing Your Vehicle 338 Stuck Freeing 297 Sunrider 160 162 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 34 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 227 Swing Gate Rear 26 Tachometer 175 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 201 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 176 Tilt S
152. 30 ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ON RUN ON RUN ESC 4L ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC TSC TSC TSC TSC ESC Partial Off ESC Partial Off TCS ESC TCS ESC ESC ESC OFF ESC On ESC Partial Off
153. Call Dial Ready Redial Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Ready Phonebook Erase All Uconnect Phone Uconnect Ready Phonebook List Names Uconnect Phone Call Edit Delete Uconnect Phone
154. O 72 22 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 10 MAX A C A C A C ATC AUTO AUTO
155. 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 Sunrider 7 8 1 Sunrider 3 4 5 6 1 2 DVD 24 72 41 5
156. BeltAlert BeltAlert BeltAlert Chrysler Group LLC BeltAlert BeltAlert BeltAlert 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
157. SERVICE TPM SYSTEM TPMS EVIC EVIC LOW TIRE XX Inflate to XX EVIC Inflate to XX XXX 4 30 15 24 TPMS Lo Tire 24 20 15 Lo Tire TPMS L
158. 1 2 1 2 T50 Torx 3 RKE LOCK RKE RKE CR2032 1 RKE RKE 2 3 RKE 433 92 RKE 1 3 2 CB RKE 1 RKE
159. 1 7 7 12 20 68 32 3 21 1 7 12 7 6 2 40 13
160. 224 Four Wheel Drive Operation 224 Four Way Hazard Flasher 289 354 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 297 Front Axle Differential 327 Fuel 272 Adding 274 Additives 273 Ethanol 272 Filler Cap Gas Cap 274 Gasoline 272 Gauge 173 Octane Rating 272 Requirements 341 Tank Capacity 341 Fueling 274 Fuses 332 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 274 275 306 Gasoline Fuel 272 Gasoline Clean Air 273 Gauges Coolant Temperature 176 Fuel 173 Odometer 177 Speedometer 173 Tachometer 175 Gear Ranges 217 222 Gear Select Lever Override 300 Glass Cleaning 330 Gross Axle Weight Rating 276 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 275 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 64
161. M19 25 2 1 ASD M20 15 M21 20 3 ASD M22 10 M23 10 M24 25 M25 20 M26 10 M27 10 M28 10 M29 10 M30 15 J1962 M3 20 M4 2 M5 25 M6 20 1 M7 20 2 M8 20 M9 20 M10 15 DVD M11 10 M12 30 M13 20 M14 20 J7 30 ABS J8 J9 40 PZEV J10 30 J11 30 J12 30 J13 60 IOD J14 40 J15 40 J17 40 J18 20 PCM J19 60 J20 30 J21 20 J22 M1 15 CHMSL M2 20
162. 174 Rear Fog 340 Rear Servicing 340 Rear Tail Lamps 340 Seat Belt Reminder 173 Security Alarm 176 Service 338 Side Marker 340 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 179 Traction Control 180 247 Turn Signal 56 102 173 339 340 Voltage 173 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 173 Loading Vehicle Tires 254 Locking Axle 227 Locks 22 Automatic Door 23 Child Protection 24 Door 22 Power Door 23 Steering Wheel 13 Lubrication Body 315 Lug Nuts 290 Maintenance Free Battery 311 Maintenance Procedures 306 Maintenance Schedule 346 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 175 Manual Transmission 221 326 Fluid Level Check 327 Lubricant Selection 326 343 356
163. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 Freedom Top Freedom Top
164. 308 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 38 Entry System Illuminated 16 Ethanol 272 Event Data Recorder 40 Exhaust Gas Caution 54 Exhaust System 54 319 Exterior Lights 56 Fabric Care 329 330 Fabric Top 330 Filters Air Cleaner 308 Air Conditioning 206 313 Engine Oil 308 Flashers Hazard Warning 289 Turn Signal 56 173 339 340 Flooded Engine Starting 214 Fluid Capacities 341 Fluid Leaks 56 Fluid Level Checks 327 Engine Oil 307 Manual Transmission 327 Power Steering 237 Fluid Brake 343 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 342 Fog Light Service 340 Fog Lights 102 340 Fog Lights Rear 340 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 97 Folding Rear Seat 99 Folding Windshield 163 Four Wheel Drive
165. TPMS SERVICE TPM SYSTEM EVIC TPMS 20 24 15 TPMS 75 EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 91 RON 40 WWFC TPMS LOW TIRE EVIC Inflate to XX XX 20 15 24 TPMS EVIC XX
166. 1 Ready 2 Select Audio Setup Devices 3 Uconnect phone SEEK UP Next Track VR VR Previous Track Browse List Play List List TUNE TUNE USB TUNE TUNE iPod PRESET USB iPod 1 2 3 4 5 6 PRESET List PRESET Play LIST LIST USB iPod TUNE TUNE iPod USB
167. 220 MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 221 Shifting 222 Downshifting 222 Reverse Shifting 224 209 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC 224 Operating Instructions Precautions 224 Shift Positions 225 Shifting Procedure 226 AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS 227 ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED 227 ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS 228 OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS 229 Side Step Removal If Equipped 229 The Basics Of Off Road Driving 229 When To Use 4L Low Range 230 Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation 230 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 230 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points
168. 231 Hill Climbing 232 Driving Through Water 234 After Driving Off Road 236 POWER STEERING 236 Power Steering Fluid Check 237 PARKING BRAKE 237 BRAKE SYSTEM 239 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 239 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 239 Traction Control System TCS 240 Brake Assist System BAS 240 210 Hill Start Assist HSA 241 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 243 Electronic Stability Control ESC 244 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 247 Trailer Sway Control TSC 248 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 248 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
169. 3 4 5 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 6 2 2 7 3 3 8 4 9 5 8 Velcro 1 2 3 4 5 6 Velcro 2 5 7 8 1 Sunrider 2 2 3 4 5 Sunrider Sunrider 6 Sunrider 7 41 5
170. 5 TPM TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS TPMS 1 2 3 TPMS TPMS 7 0 6 5 1 12
171. ESC Full Off ESC Partial Off ESC ESC ESC Full Off ESC ESC On Partial Off TCS ESC TCS Partial Off TCS ESC TSC Partial Off TCS ESC BLD 64 TCS 40 40 64 ESC ESC Partial Off 35 56 ESC ESC Full Off ESC Full Off ESC 4L ESC 64 40 ESC 4L ESC ESC Partial Off ESC Full Off ESC OFF PARK PARK PARK ESC Full Off ESC E
172. MENU 2 EVIC 3 Compass Variance EVIC SELECT 4 COMPASS 5 SELECT DTE DTE DTE 30 48 DTE LOW FUEL LOW FUEL DTE START RUN SELECT RUN START CAL EVIC 360 CAL EVIC CAL 1 PARK EVIC
173. Ready Setup Phone Pairing Setup Phone Pairing Phonebook New Entry Uconnect PHONE Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone 151 1234 5555 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth 1 0 Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone UconnectPhone com Uconnect Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone
174. COMPASS ECO ECO SELECT SELECT EVIC Reset Main Menu Personal Settings EVIC Personal Settings EVIC ECO ODO ECO Trip B Trip A ECO ECO EVIC EVIC EVIC E S N NW NE W SW SE EVIC PARK RESET STEP 8 1 15 1
175. 25 4 ALR LATCH ALR LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH 1 ALR 2 3 LATCH
176. SET 25 40 ON OFF ON OFF SET ON OFF 1 SET 3 RES 2 CANCEL 4
177. 24 15 Uconnect 1 0 0 2 PARK NEUTRAL 3 4 1 LOCK 2 ON RUN LOCK LOCK 3 4 5 1 2 UNLOCK LOCK 2 1 3
178. 292 Pretensioners Seat Belts 33 Programmable Electronic Features 192 Radial Ply Tires 259 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 322 Radio Sound Systems 193 Radio Operation 198 Rear Axle Differential 327 Rear Swing Gate 26 Rear Window Defroster 167 Rear Window Features 167 Rear Wiper Washer 167 Recorder Event Data 40 357 Recreational Towing 283 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 284 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 285 Refrigerant 313 Release Hood 100 Reminder Lights On 102 Reminder Seat Belt 28 Remote Control Door Locks 16 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 16 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 197 Replacement Bulbs 338 Replacement Keys 14 Replacement Parts 306 Replacement Tires 263 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 187 Restraint Head 97 Restra
179. 32 ESC ESC EVIC 33 EVIC EVIC STEP TPMS TPMS TPMS 29 30 31 ETC ETC
180. 7 HOT 80 27 27 80 HOT 82 180 ATF
181. 7 ESC HSA 90 7 1 HSA 7 1 HSA HSA HSA 8 3 REVERSE DRIVE HSA HSA REVERSE NEUTRAL HSA REVERSE NEUTRAL NEUTRAL NEUTRAL NEUTRAL HSA NEUTRAL HSA HSA TCS ESC Full Partial Off Off ESC BAS BAS
182. 1 PSX24W 2 P27 7W 2 PY27 7W 2 W5W 2 H4 2 12V14W 2 P27 7W 2 PY27 7W 2 W5W 2 1 2 4 1 3 4 4 1 M31 20 M32 10 TT EUROPE M33 10 M34 10 M35 10 M36 20 M37 10 M38 25 M15 20 M16 10 M17 15 M18 15
183. XXX kg XXX XXX 1 1 6 TIN TIN TIN DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT MA L9 4 1 ABCD 03 03 01 2001 01 031 2000 1991 1981 95 H SL XL LL G F E D C P215 65R15XL 9
184. 7 8 9 MOPAR 1 2 R134a R 134a HFC PAG HFO 1234yf HFO 1234yf HFC GWP PAG 1 2 3 4 HVAC 1 2
185. MENU 2 EVIC 3 Calibrate Compass EVIC SELECT 4 CAL EVIC 360 5 CAL EVIC EVIC EVIC SELECT RESET SELECT RESET ALL SELECT SELECT RESET SELECT RESET ALL ECO COMPASS ECO EVIC ECO ECO
186. 103 Instrument Panel Dimmer 103 58 Interior Lights 103 Headlight Leveling System If Equipped 104 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 105 Windshield Wiper Operation 105 Intermittent Wiper System 106 Windshield Washers 106 Mist Feature 106 TILT STEERING COLUMN 107 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 107 To Activate 108 To Set A Desired Speed 108 To Deactivate 108 To Resume Speed 108 To Vary The Speed Setting 108 To Accelerate For Passing 109 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET 110 CUPHOLDERS 112 Front Cupholders
187. 95 Heated Seats If Equipped 96 Head Restraints 97 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models 97 Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models 98 Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models 98 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models 99 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 100 LIGHTS 101 Multifunction Lever 101 Headlights And Position Lights 101 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 101 Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 102 Turn Signals 102 Lane Change Assist 102 Lights On Reminder 102 High Low Beam Switch 102 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 102 Rear Fog Lights If Equipped
188. VR Next Track Previous VR Track lt lt RW RW gt gt FF gt gt lt lt RW FF gt gt lt lt SEEK SEEK gt gt lt lt SEEK Next or Previous VR Track INFO INFO INFO REPEAT Repeat ON VR Repeat Off SCAN iPod USB MP3 SCAN SCAN Scan lt lt SEEK SEEK gt gt RND RES Shuffle ON Shuffle OFF USB iPod Shuffle ON VR Shuffle Off RND USB iPod iPod USB AUX USB i
189. 13 14 15 16 W 6 7 Velcro 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 6 2 2 7 3 3 8 4 4 9 5 10 7 Velcro 2 5 8 9 Velcro
190. 300 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 300 Without The Ignition Key 302 Four Wheel Drive Models 302 288 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis tance the Hazard Warning flashers will con tinue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down In city traffic while stopped shift transmis sion into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature
191. If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Front Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is in the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the position lights or head lights and pull out the end of the lever Turn Signal Operation 102 Rear Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the rear fog lights turn on the front position lights or headlights pull out the end of the multifunction lever and rotate the lever to the last detent NOTE The headlights will always be on when the rear fog lamps are activated Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center po
192. to Kelly Smith Who do you want to call Uconnect Uconnect Uconnect Uconnect pair a phone phone pairing Pairing Phone book Phone book previous redial select phone select send set up phone settings phone set up transfer call Uconnect Tutorial Uconnect voice Training work yes Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav AM Uconnect SD FM USB iPod 8 4 Uconnect Zero one two three four five six seven eight nine Asterisk Star Plus Hash all All of them Breakdown Service call cancel confirmation prom
193. 2 RKE 10 RKE 3 4 RKE RKE RKE 5 RKE RKE RKE RKE EVIC EVIC EVIC 1 RKE 10 4 2 RKE RKE 30 OFF
194. 239 Bulb Replacement 338 Bulbs Light 56 Calibration Compass 184 189 Capacities Fluid 341 Caps Filler Fuel 274 352 Power Steering 237 Radiator Coolant Pressure 322 Car Washes 328 Carbon Monoxide Warning 54 Cargo Light 104 Cellular Phone 64 198 Center High Mounted Stop Light 340 Chains Tire 264 Changing A Flat Tire 290 Chart Tire Sizing 250 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 175 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 54 Checks Safety 54 Child Restraint 40 Child Restraints Booster Seats 43 Child Restraints 40 Child Seat Installation 51 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 49 Infants And Child Restraints 42 Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 48 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt 50 Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4
195. 4L ESC Off Indicator Light 4H 2H 2H 4H 4H 2H 2H 4H 4L 4H 4L 4H 4L Rubicon N N PARK 5 64 53 42 31 2 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24
196. 7 1 Sunrider 2 Freedom Top 3 4 2 Freedom Top 3 4 5 a T30 Torx b c d Torx T30 5 Sunrider
197. ERM ESC TSC HDC ESC ABS ABS ON PARK PARK PARK
198. 112 Rear Cupholders 112 STORAGE 112 Glove Compartment 112 Console Storage Compartment 112 Rear Storage Compartment If Equipped 113 DUAL TOP TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED 113 Removing The Soft Top Two Door Models 113 Installing The Soft Top Two Door Models 114 59 DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED 116 Removing The Soft Top Four Door Models 116 Installing The Soft Top Four Door Models 117 FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED 119 Front Panel s Removal 120 Freedom Top Storage Bag 120 Front Panel s Installation 122 Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard Top Removed 122 Rear Hard Top Removal 123 Rear Hard Top Installation 124 DOOR FRAME
199. 22 ECO 15 1000 MIL 16 MIL OBD II ON ON RUN OFF MIL MIL 17 NEUTRAL H H ABS EBD EBD ABS
200. 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Warning Label On Front Passenger Sun Visor 27 4 Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 6 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 8 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured 9 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restr
201. PARK PARK START 10 15 10 LOCK 15 10 20 29 115 110 115 110 PARK REVERSE START 10 LOCK 15 10
202. 1 4 2 5 3 6 TSC ESC TSC ESC ESC Partial Off ESC Full Off TSC HDC HDC HDC HDC HDC HDC 30 48 HDC HDC HDC 1 5 1 4 2 5 6 5 4 5 5 9 DRIVE 7 5 12 REVERSE 1 1 5 HDC HDC ESC ESC ESC ON RUN ESC ESC 48
203. 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 Sunrider Sunrider 12 13 14 15 Sunrider 15 Sunrider Sunrider 16 Sunrider 6 7 Velcro 8 9 10 11 1 2
204. Inflate to XX 20 15 24 75 EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 75 SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 5 TPMS EVIC 24 15 TPMS SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 75 SERVICE TPM SYSTEM EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 1 TPM 2 3 4 5 TPM EVIC SERVICE TPM SYSTEM SERVICE TPM SYSTEM TPM
205. Closing The Sunrider 163 FOLDING WINDSHIELD 163 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 164 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 166 REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY 167 Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped 167 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 167 61 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in
206. For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speak ing to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR en gine Natural speech allows the user to speak com mands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recog nized 65 The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can
207. Hill Descent Control In dicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will become deactivated until the brakes have cooled Disabling HDC Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of 4WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instru ment cluster will turn off TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 4 Maximum Load 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Trac tion and Temperature Grades 249 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires de signed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Tempo rary high pressure compact spare tires have the lett
208. NOTE The driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone 64 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phones Some phones may not support all the Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mo bile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing
209. ON RUN RKE 66 20 RKE RKE RKE RKE EVIC EVIC RKE 29 31 1 2 LOCK LOCK RKE 3 16
210. Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Uconnect Bluetooth Uconnect Phone 2000 Uconnect Phone SIM Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Uconnect Ready Phonebook New Entry Work Home Other Mobile Ready Setup Phone Pairing Pair a Phone PIN
211. 3 With the wiper blade disengaged remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm 4 Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 3 Release Tab Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 3 Release Tab Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 3 Release Tab 316 Installing The Front Wipers 1 Lift the wiper arm off of the glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position 2 Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm 3 Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade 4 Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm latch engagement will be accom panied by an audible click 5 Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To access the wiper arm nut 2 Remove the wiper arm nut and gently rock the wiper arm while pulling towards you to remove wiper arm from the stud 3 To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm grasp the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand With your left hand Rear Wiper Assembly 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 3 Wiper Blade Wiper Arm With Pivot Cap Removed 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm Nut 3 Wiper Arm 317 hold the w
212. IF EQUIPPED CAUTION The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping sup plies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environ mental rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and body side or fully removed CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal Removing the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper in stallation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the ve hicles interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper in stallation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior 119 Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before remov ing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Turn the rear fasteners knobs located on the overhead speaker bar assembly coun
213. Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON RUN 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START 12 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to re move the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steer ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the left or right to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Auto
214. Lower Switch Bank 4 Assist Handle 10 Power Mirror Switch If Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Horn 6 Power Window Switches 171 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 172 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase en gine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sys tem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Front Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approxi mately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank 5 Speedometer Indicates vehic
215. NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process 338 Headlamp 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket as semblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and re move 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Remove the connector from the lamp and remove the rubber seal 8 Unlatch the metal spring bulb retainer by pushing forward and outward on retaining legs 9 Pull the bulb from the housing 10 Install the bulb into the headlamp housing CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 11 Latch the metal spring retainer to headlamp bulb 12 Install the rubber seal and connector to the headlamp bulb 13 Reinstall lamp to body with retaining ring and four screws 14 Reinstall park and turn signal connectors and reinstall front grille Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front
216. The resulting electrical spark could cause Continued WARNING Continued the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the nega tive jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 296 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charg ing system inspected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s bat tery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehi cle s battery will discharge sufficiently to de grade battery life and o
217. able door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s inte rior Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Grasp the half door window and pull upward Separating RKE Transmitter Halves Upper Half Door Window 18 Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with the pockets in the lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This proce dure is furnished for use during off road operation only 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a T50 Torx head driver NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor 3 Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pushing the tab at the base of the connector and pulling down to disconnect Door Removal Warning Label Hinge Pin Screw 19 4 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage the paint 5 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when remov ing them
218. prove visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh clean ing agents 331 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the win dow quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driv ing and vehicle washing will eventually im pact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubri cated regularly Use MOPAR Soft Top Zip per Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equiva lent into the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equiva lent into the zipper slide Several applica tions may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Ad
219. Anti Lock Brake System ABS Valve Stability Control System Totally Integrated Power Module 333 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J8 J9 40 Amp Green PZEV Sec Motor Flex Fuel J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Relay Manifold Tuning Valve J11 30 Amp Pink Sway Bar J12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor Radiator Fan J13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw IOD Main J14 40 Amp Green Rear Defroster J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module PCM Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO HI J21 20 Amp Blue Front Rear Washer J22 Spare M1 15 Amp Blue Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Switch Stop Lamp Feed M2 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting Stoplamp M3 20 Amp Yellow Frt Rear Axle Locker Relay 334 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M4 2 Amp Grey Clock Spring M5 25 Amp Clear Power Inverter If Equipped M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 1 Rain Sensor M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 2 BATT ACC SELECT M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat If Equipped M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw Vehicle Entertainment System Satellite Digital Audio Receiver SDARS DVD Hands
220. Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information 326 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle If the fluid becomes contaminated with water it should be changed immediately Otherwise change the fluid as recommended in the Service And War ranty Handbook Refer to the Service And Warranty Handbook for the proper mainte nance intervals Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replaci
221. PARK 2 RESET RESET 3 CAL 4 5 360 8 CAL DTE DTE DTE Elapsed Time START RUN 59 59 STEP CMTC Compass Outside Temperature AVG ECO DTE ET AVG ECO ET RESET 2 STEP ET AVG ECO STEP Chrysler Uconnect gps GPS
222. PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dan gerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instruc tions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or elec trical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment behind the Power Distribution Center WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hy drogen gas which is flammable and explo sive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the auto
223. Phone Push the button Following the beep say Mute To un mute the Uconnect Phone Push the button Following the beep say Mute off 73 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa push the button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced push the button and say Select or Delete Also see the ne
224. Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted NOTE Only the phonebook in the current lan guage is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Uconnect Phonebook Names Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available To call one of the names in the list push the button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are avail able on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
225. Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will ap pear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or down loaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook The Uconnect Phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made
226. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has de tected a malfunction or has become inopera tive The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operating 13 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tach
227. Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification 28 The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illumi nate while the driver s or outboard front passenger s if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unbuckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal condi tions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk o
228. TPMS TPMS HOTOIL HOTOIL gASCAP gASCAP noFUSE IOD noFUSE CHAngE OIL CHAngE OIL 12 ON RUN ON RUN 10 OFF LOCK 23 24 25 ECO door gATE Low Tire Pressure LoW tirE HOT
229. To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This proce dure is furnished for use during off road operation only 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a T50 Torx head driver NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor Door Strap Harness Location 1 Wiring Harness follow the harness up and under the instrument panel to the connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap Door Removal Warning Label 20 3 Slide the front seat s fully forward 4 Remove the trim access door from the bot tom of the B pillar 5 Unplug the wiring harness connector NOTE Squeeze the tab on the base of the connec tor This will unlock the connector tab allow ing the harness to be disconnected 6 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Hinge Pin Screw Trim Access Door Connector Latched Connector Unplugged 21 7 With the door open lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when remov ing them To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order DOOR
230. authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an elec tronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Over drive if the following conditions are present The shift lever is in the DRIVE position Vehicle speed is sufficiently high The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick al lows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and im prove overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will down shift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is ac tive the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster 220 In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selec
231. battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Lamp 658 Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 Heater Control Lamps 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defogger Soundbar Dome Lamp 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lamps 2 W16W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamps 2 PSX24W Rear Fog Lamps 2 P27 7W Front Direction Lamps 2 PY27 7W Front Side Repeaters Side Marker Lamps 2 W5W Headlamps 2 H4 Front Position Lamps 2 12V14W Stop Rear Position Lamps 2 P27 7W Rear Direction Lamps 2 PY27 7W License Lamp 2 W5W NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local au thorized dealer BULB REPLACEMENT
232. improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind shield This setting is good for maintaining com fort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when nec essary Recirculation Control Pushing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to
233. it may be desirable to switch to the ESC Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ESC Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indi cator Light will be illuminated When in ESC Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the ESC Partial Off mode ESC Full Off This mode is entered by pressing and holding momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for five seconds In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability of fered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Full Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only When in ESC Full Off mode ESC and TCS except for the Brake Limited Differential BLD feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph 64 km h For speed
234. just behind the rear door open ing 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 127 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield 6 Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame 7 Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the front of the rear door frame Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks 8 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 9 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners manual on your DVD for instructional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare Continued 128 CAUTION Continued tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not de signed as a structural member of
235. need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission con trol system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter dam age and power loss will soon occur Imme diate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic sys tem can determine if the fuel filler cap is possi bly loose improperly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages
236. the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and 192 hold the SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Headlamps With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected an
237. tom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zip pers are properly started and aligned be fore zipping to prevent damage 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 142 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 17 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 18 Apply downward pressure on the top cor ner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel 19 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position 143 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners manual on your DVD for instructional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not de signed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have
238. within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accelera tion in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which ve hicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models 53 CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a nor mal part of the break in and not interpreted as a problem Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 900 miles 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous
239. 67 Hard Top 119 Hard Top Removal 123 Hard Top Modular 119 Hazard Warning Flasher 289 Head Restraints 97 Headlights Automatic 101 Bulb Replacement 339 High Beam 102 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 102 Leveling 104 On With Wipers 102 Replacing 339 Switch 101 Heated Mirrors 63 Heated Seats 96 Heater 199 Heater Engine Block 215 High Beam Indicator 175 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 102 Hill Descent Control 248 Hill Descent Control Indicator 248 Hill Start Assist 241 Hood Release 100 Ignition 12 Key 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Illuminated Entry 16 Immobilizer Sentry Key 13 Information Center Vehicle 185 Inside Re
240. 800 O Ready Setup Select Phone Uconnect Phone 9 30 Uconnect Phone Ready Setup Phone Pairing Delete Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Tutorial Uconnect Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone 5 Voice Training System Training Start Voice Training Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone
241. Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alter nator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of acces sory or accessory bracket from the plug Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer Opt 111 CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Rear Cupholders The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console STORAGE Glove Compartment The lockable glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the lower instrument panel Pull outward on the handle latch to open the glove compartment Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment press the latch and lift the cover Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders Center Console 112 There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid The conso
242. Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel eration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is gen erated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel sepa rate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occupants for improved inter action with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights ste reos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs You
243. Bolt Size Lug Nut Bolt Socket Size 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m 1 2 x 20 19 mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns 290 WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is danger ous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a too
244. Correct Insertion 149 Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 150 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 151 NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on the windshield frame 4 Open the swing gate 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rea
245. Free Module RADIO Antenna Universal Garage Door Opener Vanity Lamp M11 10 Amp Red Ignition Off Draw Climate Control System Underhood Lamp M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier M13 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw Cabin Compartment Node Wireless Control Module SIREN Multifunction Control Switch M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Export Only M15 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System Rear View Mirror Cabin Compartment Node Transfer Case Switch Multi Function Control Switch Tire Pressure Monitor Glow Plug Module Export Diesel Only M16 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 335 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail License Park Lamp M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail Park Run Lamp M19 25 Amp Clear Auto Shut Down ASD 1 and 2 M20 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light Switch Bank M21 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down ASD 3 M22 10 Amp Red Right Horn HI LOW M23 10 Amp Red Left Horn HI LOW M24 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Diesel Lift Pump Export Only M26 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch Driver Window Switch M27 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed Wireless Module M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module M29 10 Amp Red Powertrain M30 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt J1962 Diagnostic Feed M31 20 Amp Yellow Backup
246. If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the short ened rail edge 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow 140 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 10 To install the side windows affix the win dow temporarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 141 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Vel cro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bot
247. Locks 22 Power Door Locks If Equipped 23 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors 24 WINDOWS 25 Power Windows If Equipped 25 Wind Buffeting 26 REAR SWING GATE 26 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 27 Important Safety Precautions 27 Seat Belt Systems 28 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 33 Child Restraints 40 10 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 53 Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped 54 SAFETY TIPS 54 Transporting Passengers 54 Exhaust Gas 54 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 55 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicl
248. Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still apply ing throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use second gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmis sion with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good prac tice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recov ered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momen tum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt m
249. Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation tran sition or when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions Axle Lock Switch Sway Bar Switch 227 WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances ve hicle stability and is necessary for maintain ing control of the vehicle The system moni tors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Oper ating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be
250. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pres sure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels The TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replace ment equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inop
251. Protection 328 Cruise Light 179 Cupholders 112 Customer Assistance 348 Data Recorder Event 40 Defroster Rear Window 167 Defroster Windshield 55 200 204 Delay Intermittent Wipers 106 Diagnostic System Onboard 306 Dipsticks Oil Engine 307 Power Steering 237 Disabled Vehicle Towing 300 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 322 Door Locks 22 Child Protection Door Lock Rear Doors 24 Door Locks 22 Key Fob 22 353 Remote 22 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Door Locks Automatic 23 Doors 18 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 94 Driving 228 Dual Top 113 116 Electric Remote Mirrors 63 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 110 Electrical Power Outlets 110 Electronic Brake Control System 239 Brake Assist System 240 Electro
252. Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main taining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Service and Warranty Hand book for filter service intervals 206 Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions 207 208 5 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES 213 Manual Transmission If Equipped 213 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 213 Normal Starting 213 If Engine Fails To Start 214 Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C 215 After Starting 215 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 215 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 215 Key Ignition Park Interlock 216 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 216 Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped 216 Gear Ranges 217 AUTOSTICK 220 Operation
253. Retaining Tabs Air Filter Access Door Open 1 Air Conditioning Filter Access Door 2 Air Conditioning Air Filter 314 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular at tention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant di rectly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to
254. Shift Speeds 222 Master Cylinder Brakes 324 Methanol 272 Methanol Fuel 272 Mini Trip Computer 181 188 Mirrors 62 Automatic Dimming 63 Electric Powered 63 Electric Remote 63 Heated 63 Outside 62 Rearview 62 Vanity 63 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Modular Hard Top 119 Monitor Tire Pressure System 265 MOPAR Parts 306 Multi Function Control Lever 101 New Vehicle Break In Period 53 Occupant Restraints 27 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 272 Odometer 177 181 Trip 177 181 Oil Change Indicator 178 187 Oil Change Indicator Reset 178 187 Oil Filter Selection 308 Oil Pressure Light 174 Oil Engine 307 Capacity 341 Change Interval 187 Dipstick
255. Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the ve hicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 41 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be
256. Weather Condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the sys tem may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook 75 Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most num ber combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be sup ported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather conditions and Operation from the driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and net
257. a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills imme diately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle 322 The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may ob serve vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do no
258. a chime to indicate that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road opera tion If this HOTOIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning message is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some cir cumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM ETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odometer displ
259. a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the con verter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods o
260. a short period while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch posi tion If the vehicle is pointed down hill in NEU TRAL and your foot is not on the clutch it will roll down hill HSA will not hold you in this case To prevent this do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction NOTE Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the trans mission in PARK Continued WARNING Continued Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember t
261. and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over heated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued WARNING Continued Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ties to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by
262. and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset but ton CD Player Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 197 current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the
263. as anticipated Coordi nate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure ac curate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever com pletely When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate Parking Brake 237 NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is plac
264. be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the wind shield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Front Wiper Control Mist Control 106 TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward The tilt lever i
265. be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Adjustment 93 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or low ered by using the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat Front Seatback Recline Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the entire seat forward Seat Height Adjustment Recline Lever Easy Entry Lever Easy Entry Seat 94 To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward unt
266. be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into first gear manual trans mission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After cross ing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the ve hicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmis sion transfer case engine or vehicle inte rior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy This vehicle is capable of crossing throug
267. brake pressure is applied to the slip ping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the sys tem will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the anti lock brake system ABS Apply ing the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot pre vent the natural laws
268. com partment The total weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs 75 kg WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermit tent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers Continued Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Front Wiper Control 105 CAUTION Continued freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings The delay cycle can
269. device manufacturer Install on Rear Tires Only A 235 65R17 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type Class S specification is recommended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted traction device clear ance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only trac tion devices in good condition are used Broken devices can cause serious dam age Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device break age Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Continued CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufactur er s instructions on the method of installa tion operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMEN
270. four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accel erator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in RE VERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and pro ceed with caution Allow engine braking to con trol the descent and apply your brakes if nec essary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with en gine brakin
271. grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace 339 Front Fog Lamp 1 Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front fog lamp 2 Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front fog lamp connector receptacle 3 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch fea tures and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing and then connect the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Fog Lamp 1 Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the rear fog lamp 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 4 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 1 Re
272. high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lu brication to minimize the possibility of compres sor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to De frost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide suffi cient heating If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recircu lated air within the passenger compartment
273. inad equate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake con troller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required 279 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 654 lbs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package includes a 13 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved tr
274. instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is espe cially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK OFF position before restarting Transmis sion gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the LOCK OFF position first PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK oth erwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the pa
275. is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake func tions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been cor rected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
276. message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature push and release the MENU button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the Main menu Compass Outside Temperature and ECO display Digital Speedometer Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty Elapsed Time Vehicle Information Coolant Temp Oil Pressure Transmission Temp Oil Life Remaining Automatic Oil Change Indicator EVIC Units Selection System Warnings Personal Settings Tire Pressure NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word RESET next to it When the SELECT button is pushed the se lected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic Pushing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time After three seconds without pushing SELECT RE SET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset Compass Outside Temperature Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Push and release the CO
277. mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an auto matic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Load ing Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire 260 Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment
278. of the hood opening Push the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Hood Latch 100 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the position lights headlights headlight beam selection passing lights flash to pass fog lights if equipped instrument panel light dim ming and turn signals The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights And Position Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for position lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automa
279. only available when the iPod is con nected and playing 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are based on the music database provided by Gracenote 89 90 NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped ve hicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navi gation Phone Climate More or Set tings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with Navigation 91 92 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey SEATS Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint Sys tem of the vehicle WARNING It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Re lease the bar once you have reached the de sired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to
280. operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The rear window defroster button is located on the climate controls mode control knob Push the button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster au tomatically turns off after approximately 10 min utes For an additional five minutes of opera tion push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild wash ing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Rear Wiper Washer Control 167 168 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 171 IN
281. original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping 8 Remove the side bar assembly and reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause per sonal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove the retain ing nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 12 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers 13 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the cente
282. outboard head restraints and removable center head restraint To remove the center head re straint press the release button located on the base of the head restraint and pull upward on the head restraint To install the head restraint hold release button while pushing downward on the head restraint Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily Adjustment Button 97 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward 3 Return the seat to the normal position 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and firmly lock the seat into position Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly In a collision you or others in your ve
283. rail near the center of the vehicle as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of the engine block NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this ve hicle could seriously affect its roadworthi ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number 8 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED 13 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 13 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 13 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System 13 SENTRY KEY 13 Replacement Keys 14 Customer Key Programming 14 General Information
284. rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat 2 Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path 3 Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 4 Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing re tracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 6 Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any webbing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 51 7 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child re straint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child
285. remove salt or dirt from a dry wind shield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any of these condi tions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically not just when wiper per formance problems are experienced This in spection should include the following points Wear Or Uneven Edges Foreign Material Hardening Or Cracking Deformation Or Fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged Wiper Blade Removal Installation CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged 315 1 Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position 2 To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm press the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand slide the wiper blade down to wards the base of the wiper arm
286. respond without pushing the Voice Command button on your steering wheel Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply push the button and follow the au dible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the but ton on the faceplate Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone refer to Introduction section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your mobile phone owner s manual The Uconnect website may also pro vide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Activate the Bluetooth on your mobile phone Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pai
287. s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments Remove the child restraint before adjusting the Continued 42 WARNING Continued vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Us
288. seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a colli sion 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoul der and chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 31 Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the seat belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lockout feature to ensure that
289. sembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addi tion the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE mes sage for a minimum of five seconds An Inflate to XX message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing will also be displayed Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure inflation value shown in the Inflate to XX message The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres sure s have been received Tire Pressure Monitor Display 269 NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above
290. signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To com pensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the com pass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate com pass heading 182 Compass Variance Map 183 To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the STEP button to increase the variance one step Re peat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During pro gramming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the com pass Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the RESET button for ap proximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is
291. substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of 179 replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the origi nal equipment tires and wheels TPMS pres sures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Un desirable system operation or sensor dam age may result when using rep
292. the compass sensor is located 189 Compass Variance Map 190 To Change The Compass Variance 1 Turn the ignition switch RUN it is not nec essary to start the engine 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected accord ing to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pushing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset the history information will be erased and the av eraging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be trav eled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a tex
293. the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor immediately take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjustable Anchorage 32 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position and if you are taller than aver age you will prefer the shoul
294. the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmis sion gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission pro vides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be some what abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hun dred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears 216 The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift posi tions Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will manu ally select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the
295. the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remem ber always wear seat belts 129 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s inte rior Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top Refer to Lowering The Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Remove the side windows 2 Remove the back window 3 Release header latches from the windshield frame 130 4 Release the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehi
296. the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be in stalled If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION Do not run a fabric top through an auto matic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry
297. the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an exces sively swaying trailer is recognized TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use cau tion when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Tow ing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from sway ing TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the ESC Partial Off or ESC Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the ve hicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary The symbol indicates the status of the Hill Descent Control HDC fea ture The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and
298. the window and open the door with the outside door handle Child Protection Door Lock Function 24 WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio Push the switch downward to open the window and up ward to close the window The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is pro grammable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Four Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear pas senger window and the lower right switch con trols the right rear passenger window Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window wil
299. tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op portunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emer gency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Tempo rary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be Continued WARNING Continued replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified b
300. to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They con tain carbon monoxide CO which is color less and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate con trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 54 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspe
301. to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the en gine running With the transfer case in NEU TRAL N ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post Shifting Out of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it connected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion 5 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN po sition but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting the transfer case out of NEU TRAL N the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash 285 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on man
302. two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling push the but ton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established push and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily push the button Only the active call s will be termi nated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is termi nated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold push and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may no
303. use a tow strap with a tow eye Tow straps may break or become disengaged causing serious injury or death Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death Tow Eye 298 CAUTION The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device in accordance with the highway code a rigid bar or rope to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service loca tion Continued CAUTION Continued Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles In compliance with the above conditions towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles one towing the other towed aligned as much as possible along the same center line Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not fol lowed Front Tow Eye Installation The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a door on the front bumper fascia To install the tow eye open the door using the vehicle key or a small screwdriver and thread the tow eye into the receptacle Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the tow eye and tighten refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in Section 6 for information The tow eye must be fully seated to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as shown If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket the vehicle sho
304. used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Chil dren should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle
305. vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Deter mining the correct path can be extremely diffi cult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the per son stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercar riage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or under carriage Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large 231 obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enoug
306. vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 238 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during appli cation greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operati
307. while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Con nect the jack handle driver to the extension then to the lug wrench 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully en gaged 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire Jack Warning Label Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location 293 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until e
308. 0 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 10 5 Quarts 9 9 Liters Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 341 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 or an equivalent coolant Engine Oil Gasoline We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil such as MOPAR Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 or ACEA A1 B1 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Chrysler MS 6395 or ACEA A1 B1 such as MOPAR Pennzoil Shell Helix may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters Fuel Selection Gasoline Engines 91 Research Octane Number RON 342 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission If Equipped Use only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Failure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Manu
309. 106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for us ing Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 321 distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended
310. 21 Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and loop the strap through the buckle Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat Front Panel s Installation NOTE Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block located on the rear of the panel upward 90 degrees NOTE The front panel s must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no over hang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 122 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of th
311. 3 iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 193 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device 194 Using This Feature 194 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 194 Play Mode 194 List Or Browse Mode 195 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 196 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 197 Radio Operation 197 CD Player 197 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 198 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 198 CLIMATE CONTROLS 198 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 199 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 201 Operating Tips 205 170 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 3 Radio 9
312. 303 Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped 326 Manual Transmission If Equipped 326 Transfer Case 327 Front Rear Axle Fluid 327 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion 328 FUSES 332 Totally Integrated Power Module 333 VEHICLE STORAGE 338 REPLACEMENT BULBS 338 BULB REPLACEMENT 338 Headlamp 339 Front Park Turn Signal 339 Front Side Marker 339 Front Fog Lamp 340 Rear Fog Lamp 340 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamp 340 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 340 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
313. 311 WARNING Continued Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is at tached to the positive post and the nega tive cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the bat tery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the char ger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lu bricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Re fer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty informa tion Continued WA
314. 5H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31 10 5 R15 LT P LT S T 31 145 235 215 80 85 65 10 5 R R D 18 16 15 P P P215 65R15 95H P 215 65R15 96H LT LT LT235 85R16 S T T145 80D18 103M R15 LT 10 5 31 HDC HDC 1 2 5 ESC HDC
315. 7 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 45 Older Children And Child Restraints 42 Seating Positions 44 Child Safety Locks 24 Clean Air Gasoline 273 Cleaning Wheels 329 Climate Control 198 Cold Weather Operation 215 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 198 Compact Spare Tire 260 Compass 181 184 188 Compass Calibration 184 189 Compass Variance 182 189 Computer Trip Travel 181 188 Connector UCI 193 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 193 Console 112 Console Floor 112 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 322 Cooling System 320 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 321 Coolant Capacity 341 Coolant Level 322 Disposal of Used Coolant 322 Drain Flush and Refill 320 Inspection 320 Points to Remember 323 Pressure Cap 322 Radiator Cap 322 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 321 341 Corrosion
316. 7 You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to line up Another person may be needed to help with this operation NOTE If you are doing this alone use one arm to hold the soft top up the other to align the brackets 5 Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab 6 Install the pivot bracket bolts back into place using a 10 0 mm wrench or socket driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or overtighten CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the screws if they are overtightened 7 Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket 8 Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up off hook and slide down the side bow both sides 118 9 Button the side bow tether strap both sides 10 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 11 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 12 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top in this section FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP
317. AB AIRBAG AIRBAG SAB SAB SAB SAB SAB ORC S
318. Additive Technol ogy OAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze or any globally compatible coolant antifreeze Continued CAUTION Continued If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine cool ant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12
319. Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Children 12 years or younger should ride prop erly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can be come a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 40 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instruc tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and
320. DATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 264 Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals The rea sons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference Continued CAUTION Continued in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be fol lowed to balance tire wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres sure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease T
321. DOWN button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature includ ing the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled to make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Sound Horn With Lock If Equipped When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Flash Lamp with Lock When on is selected
322. ECT OFF ON HSA HSA SELECT Off On SYSTEM OK SYSTEM OK SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT MENU 0 0 MENU Personal Settings EVIC Language SELECT 15 24 SELECT ON NEUTRAL PARK ON SELECT OFF LOCK RKE ON SELECT OFF RUN 1
323. ER TWO DOOR MODELS CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lower ing a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior 160 NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle Opening The Sunrider 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 3 Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves for ward to unlock the Sunrider links 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the material is folded back as shown NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If acti vated the soft top must be reinstalled start ing from the sail panels 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the straps around the bows as shown Repeat on the other side 6 Reposition the sun visors 161 Closing The Sunrider 1 Remove the straps from the side bows 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the vehicle 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider link SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS CAUTION Operating the top opening a d
324. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message The EVIC will also display pressure values in place of the dashes On the next ignition switch cycle the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists 271 FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc tane rating RON of 91 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline speci fications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to de liver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and stumble If you experience these problems try another brand of gasoline before considering serv
325. F ON RUN NEUTRAL PARK PARK PARK PARK PARK PARK NEUTRAL LOCK OFF LOCK OFF P PARK PARK PARK PARK DRIVE PARK PARK PARK PARK PARK LOCK OFF LOCK OFF PARK
326. Gear Shift Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when a manual shift is needed either up or down 25 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the fol lowing odometer messages will display ECO Fuel Saver Indicator door Door Ajar gATE Swing Gate Ajar LoW tirE Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy 177 NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all the messages will only be displayed in the EVIC display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles HOTOIL Transmission Temperature Warning Message The HOTOIL cluster message will appear in the odometer accompanied with
327. K NEUTRAL PARK N N NEUTRAL N N PARK N 1 2 PARK N N AutoStick AutoStick 4 2 3
328. LI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFOR MATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICA TION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommenda tions in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owner s Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufa
329. LOCKS Manual Door Locks All doors are equipped with an interior rocker type door lock lever To lock a door when leaving your vehicle push the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close the door To UNLOCK the door push the rocker lever rearward NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate glove compartment and con sole storage WARNING For personal security reasons and safety in a collision lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued Manual Door Lock Full Frame Doors Manual Door Lock Half Doors 22 WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of rea sons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear se lector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Push the switch forward to lock the doors and rearward to
330. Lamps M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller TT EUROPE M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller 336 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist Climate Control System Headlamp Wash Compass M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet M37 10 Amp Red Anti Lock Brake System Electronic Stability Control Stop Lamp Switch Fuel Pump Relay M38 25 Amp Clear Lock Unlock Motors CAUTION When installing the Integrated Power Mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure Continued CAUTION Continued When replacing a blown fuse it is impor tant to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 337 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may Remove Cartridge fuse J13 in the Power Distribution Center PDC labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD and store it in a safe location within the PDC Or disconnect the negative cable from the
331. M PASS button to display one of eight compass headings the outside temperature ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen NOTE The system will display the last known out side temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore tem perature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving 188 ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the out side temperature in the EVIC display if the audio system is on the ECO indicator will over ride the audio information display line if the Display Fuel Saver personal setting is ON see Personal Settings section This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC t
332. NG This vehicle does not have a center seating position Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Center Seat LATCH Four Door WARNING Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Swit chable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Install ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 3 Place the child seat between the lower an chorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you
333. OIL gASCAP noFUSE CHAngE OIL ECO ECO EVIC EVIC LoW tirE tirE LoW HOTOIL HOTOIL HOTOIL 18 19 20 15 21 H H ECO
334. OTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 5 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top 6 Fold header rearward pulling the fabric to the rear 146 7 Release Sunrider latch both sides 8 Open the swing gate and lower the top NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation 147 2 Install rear corner panels 3 Rotate the header forward 4 Engage the header latches 5 Install the back window 6 Install the side windows 148 7 To install the side windows affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 8 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 9 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 1 Incorrect Insertion 2
335. Odometer 177 Trip Odometer Reset Button 177 Turn Signals 102 173 339 340 UCI Connector 193 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 74 Phone Call Features 69 Phone Features 71 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 75 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 64 Uconnect Phone 65 Uconnect Voice Command 82 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 193 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 32 Upholstery Care 329 Vanity Mirrors 63 Variance Compass 182 189 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading 254 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 206 338 Viscosity Engine Oil 308 Voice Command 82 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 173 Warnings and Cautions 8 Washers Windshield 318 Washing Vehicle 328 Wheel and Wheel Trim 329 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 329 Wind Buff
336. On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the ESC Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Full Off switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the ESC Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Full Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode after each key on WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS func tionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the en hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Trailer Sway Control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni tion switch is cycled to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indi cator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been de tected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several i
337. PAR 4 MOPAR ATF 4 150000 10 MOPAR Chrysler MS 12106 OAT Pennzoil MOPAR API SAE 5W 20 Chrysler ACEA A1 B1 MS 6395 Shell Helix SAE MS 6395 Chrysler SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 20 Shell Helix Pennzoil MOPAR ACEA A1 B1 3 6 MOPAR MOPAR 91 RON 18 570 22 585 API SAE 5W 20 3 6 6 5 6 10 MOPAR 3 6 OAT 150000 Chrysler MS 12106 10 59 9 3 6 5000 146 4000315 75 120 75 120 1 1 4 2 1 2 4 1 3 4 CHMSL
338. Pod USB MP3 USB iPod iPod USB MP3 iPod USB MP3 USB iPod USB iPod USB AUX USB iPod iPod USB MP3 AUX Switch to USB USB VR USB iPod USB MP3 Play iPod iPod USB MP3 USB Play USB iPod TUNE USB AUX ECO SELECT ON OFF EVIC SELECT U S METRIC EVIC EVIC iPod MP3 USB
339. RNING Continued The air conditioning system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the sys tem adding refrigerant or any repair re quiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 312 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product However the manufac turer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C sys tem PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equip ment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C sys tem PAG compressor oil an
340. RS ORC SRS AIRBAG AIRBAG 12 1 2 ORC
341. SB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pushing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if sup ported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either push the AUX button on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device auto matically starts Play mode In Play mode the follow
342. SC ERM ERM ESC ESC Full Off ESC On ESC ESC Full Off ESC TCS BLD 64 TCS 64 40 40 ESC ESC Full Off 35 56 ESC Full ESC Off ESC ESC OFF ESC On ESC Full Off ESC ESC Partial Off ESC Full Off ESC ESC ERM ESC ERM ESC Full Off 4L ESC Full Off 4L 4L 4H 4L NEUTRAL 4L ESC OFF
343. STRUMENT CLUSTER 172 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 173 COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED 181 Control Buttons 181 Compass Temperature Display 182 Trip Conditions 185 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED 185 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 186 Gear Shift Indicator GSI If Equipped 187 Oil Change Required 187 EVIC Main Menu 188 Compass Outside Temperature Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped 188 Average Fuel Economy 191 Distance To Empty DTE 191 169 Elapsed Time 191 System Status 191 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 192 SOUND SYSTEMS 19
344. TC 283 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 283 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 284 212 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of rea sons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN Mode A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Four Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floo
345. TOR SYSTEM TPMS 265 Base System 267 Premium System If Equipped 268 TPMS Deactivation If Equipped 271 FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES 272 Methanol 272 Ethanol 272 Clean Air Gasoline 273 MMT In Gasoline 273 Materials Added to Fuel 273 ADDING FUEL 274 Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 274 TRAILER TOWING 275 Common Towing Definitions 275 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 277 Trailer And Tongue Weight 278 Towing Requirements 278 Towing Tips 282 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME E
346. USB iPod USB 4G Mini iPod iPhone 5G iPod Nano Photo iPod iPod Apple USB Uconnect USB iPod iPod AUX iPod MP3 RKE ON SELECT OFF 90 60 30 0 SELECT 90 60 30 0 DVD 10 LOCK SELECT 5 45 Off 10 90 SELECT RKE Off 90 60 30 AUTO 10 SELECT OFF ON SEL
347. Wrangler OPERATING INFORMATION 2 0 1 5 Wrangler 15JK72 126 ARA AA 15JK72 126 ARA AA Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 209 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 345 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347 10 INDEX
348. ach nut has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for correct lug nut torque 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tight ened twice For the correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel 294 JUMP STARTING
349. ach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 88 in lb 22 in lb 10 N m 2 5 N m It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstalling washer hose Push on until click is heard Press Tab To Disconnect Pinch Grip On Hose 124 DOOR FRAME CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable door frame s may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehi cle s interior The door frame s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper in stallation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This pro cedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Frame Removal 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attach ment knobs two per door WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one han
350. ach tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Economy Under inflated tires will increase tire rolling re sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride 257 Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly in flated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and di
351. ag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate Continued Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Driver And passenger Knee Impact Bolsters 34 WARNING Continued Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manu ally You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are de signed to open only when the air bags are inflating Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact
352. ailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Pin Number Function Wire Color 1 Left Turn Signal Black White 2 Rear Fog Light White 3 a Ground Common Return for Contacts Pins 1 and 2 and 4 to 8 Brown 13 Pin Connector 280 Pin Number Function Wire Color 4 Right Turn Signal Black Green 5 Right Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device b Green Red 6 Stop Lights Black Red 7 Left Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Regis tration Plate Illumination Device b Green Black Pin Number Function Wire Color 8 Reverse lights Blue Red 9 Permanent Power Supply 12V Red 10 Power Supply Controlled by Ignition Switch 12V Yellow 11 a Return for Contact Pin 10 Yellow Brown 12 Reserve for Future Allocation Pin Number Function Wire Color 13 a Return for Contact Pin 9 Red Brown NOTE The allocation pin 12 has been changed from Coding for coupled Trailer to Reserve for Future Allocation a The three return circuits shall not be connected electrically in the trailer b The rear position registration plate illumi nation device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common co
353. ailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination 275 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it s
354. aint Only use rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Re minder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the se quence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled After the sequence completes the
355. al Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Axle Differential Front We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid 343 344 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 346 345 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for maintenance schedules 346 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 348 347 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer s distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recomm
356. alve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS con sists of the following components 1 Receiver Module 2 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 3 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assem bly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound while it is stored in the spare tire location The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a Lo Tire message will be displayed in the odometer display at 3 second intervals followed by the location s of the low tire s RR LR RF LF displayed for 3 second intervals each This sequence shall be repeated for two complete cycles for each ignition on cycle Following the second cycle the odometer display shall revert back to the prior display preceding the low tire message An audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the i
357. anced Accident Response 38 Event Data Recorder EDR 40 Front Air Bag 33 34 If A Deployment Occurs 37 Knee Impact Bolsters 35 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 39 Air bag Deployment 33 Air bag Light 38 55 175 Air bag Maintenance 39 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 308 Air Conditioner Maintenance 312 Air Conditioning 199 Air Conditioning Controls 199 Air Conditioning Filter 206 313 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 312 313 Air Conditioning System 199 201 312 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 205 207 Air Pressure Tires 258 Alarm Security Alarm 15 Alarm Light 176 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Anti Lock Warning Light 175 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 321 341 Disposal 322 Appearance Care 328 Arming System Security Alarm 15 Auto Down Power Windows 25 Automatic Dimming Mirror 63 Automatic Door Locks 23 Automatic Headlights 101 Automatic Oil Chan
358. aneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas 230 or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a mini mum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire un seating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before pro ceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steer ing system loading which could cause you to loose control of your
359. area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Fold Down The Rear Seat Remove the center head restraint Locate the release lever upper outboard side of seat and lift it upward until the seatback releases Slowly fold down the seatback Center Head Restraint Release Levers 99 To Raise The Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place and install center head restraint If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seat back is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both the hood latches Raise the hood and locate the safety latch located in the middle
360. arview Mirror 62 Instrument Cluster 172 Instrument Panel and Controls 171 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 330 Integrated Power Module Fuses 333 Interior Appearance Care 329 Interior Lights 103 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 106 Introduction 4 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 196 Jack Location 291 Jack Operation 290 292 293 Jacking Instructions 292 Jump Starting 295 Key In Reminder 13 355 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Keyless Entry System 16 Keys 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 173 Lane Change Assist 102 Lap Shoulder Belts 29 Latches 56 Leaks Fluid 56 Leveling Headlight 104 Life of Tires 262 Light Bulbs 56 Lights 56 101 Airbag
361. as used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed If you are involved in another colli sion the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension ers cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies re placed by an authorized dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well 37 NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the En hanced Accident Response System perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is t
362. assem bly it has a tire pressure monitoring sen sor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light to be ON a Lo Tire message displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and Lo Tire message as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and Lo Tire mes sage will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seco
363. assenger compart ment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radia tor for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air con ditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select ei ther a primary mode as identified by the sym bols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Manual Temperature Control 199 Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives
364. at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid ex tended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experi ence speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase en gine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 282 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four Wheel Drive Models Flat Tow NONE See Instructions Automatic transmission in PARK Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL N Transfer case in NEUTRAL N Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK NOTE When recreational towing your vehicle al ways follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details 283 Recreational Towing Four Wh
365. at it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC OFF Indicator Light will always be illumi nated in 4L range when ESC is in ESC Full Off or ESC Partial Off NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC in ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability fea tures offered by ESC and ERM are disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The ESC Full Off mode is intended for off road use only 2H Range 4WD Models Or 2WD Models ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range and on 2WD vehicles ESC Partial Off When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip fea ture described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated 246 This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC
366. ated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will di minish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 239 WARNING Continued The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic in terference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected
367. ation button However under cer tain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recircu lation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Bi Level and then press the Recirculation button This fea ture reduces the possibility of window fog ging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recom mended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging 205 Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and
368. ature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode Push and hold the button for five sec onds until the session begins or Push the button and say the Voice Training System Training Start Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to fac tory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command For best performance Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry
369. audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Push the button to accept the call To reject the call push and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the incoming call was rejected 69 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Push the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call push the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold push the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold push and hold the button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If
370. ay Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or push the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or push the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the cur rent song that is playing will display info STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Press ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station
371. ay area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will display in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odom eter button on the instrument cluster To reset 178 the oil change indicator system after perform ing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 26 Hill Decent Indicator This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control HDC feature is turned on The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only
372. ays maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance interval Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommend engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 or ACEA A1 B1 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Pe troleum Institute API The manu facturer only rec ommends API Cer tified engine oils 307 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your en gine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE GRADE MOPAR 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pen nzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information
373. be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off 27 Cruise Indicator This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 28 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a
374. be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 68 After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list push the button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect
375. cantly lower Failure to follow the maximum recom mended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and or damage the clutch even if the clutch pedal is pressed Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 223 NOTE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over provides a resistance to the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into REVERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perce
376. ce This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Mirror Switch Vanity Mirror 63 Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher For Uconnect Phone with Navigation ra dio refer to the Navigation radio Manual s separate booklet Uconnect Phone section For Uconnect Phone customer support visit UconnectPhone com See the Uconnect website for supported phones Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the Uconnect Phone and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the Ucon
377. ce and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and dur ing parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 236 CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the sys tem is not functioning
378. ck plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder 3 Close all the doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm is successfully set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is armed To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON RUN position NOTE Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously de scribed arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transm
379. cle NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 5 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rear ward over the Sunrider link to lock in the link Sunrider Models only 6 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top 7 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 8 Open the swing gate and lower the top NOTE Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 131 Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top Refer to Raising The Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation 2 Engage header latches 3 Install rear corner panels 4 Install the back window 5 Install the side windows 132 6 To install the side windows affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 7 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 8 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely a
380. control and have a collision resulting in seri ous injury or death 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 262 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Cer tification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the origi nal wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failur
381. cracking cracks between two ribs Belt slips Groove jumping belt does not maintain correct position on pulley Belt broken note identify and correct prob lem before new belt is installed Noise objectionable squeal squeak or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued Accessory Belt Serpentine Belt
382. ct the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically check ing for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and re main on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Info
383. ctivated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure 17 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screw driver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interfer ence This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The ex pected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the remov
384. cturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufac tured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall 253 Term Definition Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pres
385. cturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or installation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unimpaired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Rollover Warning Label 5 The manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are at tached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are subsequently made on the manu facturer s vehicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or additives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufactur ers specifications Original MOPAR parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufact
386. d Vehicle 300 Guide 277 Recreational 283 Weight 277 Towing Eyes 298 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 283 Traction Control 240 Traction Control Light 180 Trailer Sway Control TSC 248 Trailer Towing 275 Cooling System Tips 282 Minimum Requirements 278 Trailer and Tongue Weight 278 Wiring 280 Trailer Towing Guide 277 359 Trailer Weight 277 Transaxle Autostick 220 Transfer Case 327 Fluid 343 Four Wheel Drive Operation 224 Maintenance 327 Transmission 324 Automatic 216 324 Fluid 343 Manual 221 Range Indicator 177 Shifting 215 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 18 Tread Wear Indicators 262 Trip Computer 181 Trip
387. d on the front of the door frame 125 3 Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This pro cedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Frame Installation Two Door Models If Equipped 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumb screws 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the windshield 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame 126 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both knobs Repeat on the other side Door Frame Installation Four Door Models If Equipped 1 Install the rear door frame first 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side
388. d on the lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer Control Buttons The Compass Temperature control buttons are located on the left spoke of the steering wheel Press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel to access the options in the Compass display Compass Display Control Buttons 181 NOTE The system will display the last known out side temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore tem perature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Press and release the STEP button to step through each of the following CMTC features Compass Outside Temperature AVG ECO Average Fuel Economy DTE Distance to Empty ET Elapsed Time AVG ECO and ET can be reset When the feature is displayed press and hold the RESET button until the feature resets about 2 sec onds These messages can be cycled through by pressing the STEP button on the steering wheel To reset the AVG ECO or ET press and hold the STEP button for approximately three seconds Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS
389. d refrigerants Air Conditioning Filter Replacement A C Air Filter WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compart ment and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward Glove Compartment 1 Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 Glove Compartment 313 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two air filter access doors to the HVAC housing 1 Left Retaining Tab 2 Right Retaining Tab 5 Open the two air filter access doors 6 Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC air inlet housing Pull the filter elements straight out of the housing one at a time 7 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same di rection as removal CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Close A C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining tabs 9 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals Air Filter
390. d the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position the head lights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Nav Turn By Turn If Equipped When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destination is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display Displays the units used for the Outside Tem perature Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features Push and Release the SE LECT button to toggle units between U S and METRIC Compass Varia
391. d transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup 219 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electroni cally for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission dam age Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti vated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the trans mission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK RE VERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmis sion will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve nience Your authorized dealer has diagnos tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset
392. der belt anchorage in a higher position After you release the an chorage button try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor age is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt an chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi tion without pushing or squeezing the re lease button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to re move slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the per formance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Preten sioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snu
393. disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 198 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the p
394. displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instru ment panel This is where the compass sensor is located Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the digits will go blank while the history information is erased The averaging will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is accumulated Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be trav eled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START posi tions The elapsed timer di
395. e 56 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Acces sory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of rea sons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Vehicle Key With RKE Transmitter
396. e sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the forces of nature Always observe local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Be sure to read the On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for conve nient referencing and remain with the ve hicle when sold Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or over turning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended intervals by an authorized dealer or distributor who has the qualified personnel special tools and equip ment t
397. e Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more information contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use summer tires in snow ice condi tions You could lose vehicle control result ing in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountai
398. e Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure loca tion This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed See your autho rized dealer if you require replacement or addi tional keys for your vehicle NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authori
399. e cooling sys tem effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehi cle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clear ance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom con dition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning 235 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road drivin
400. e door using a 40 Torx head driver Four Door Only 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift the rear window glass 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle 7 Release the red locking tab by pulling out ward to the right Wire Harness Connector Red Locking Tab 123 8 To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull downward to disconnect 9 To remove the washer hose pinch the grips on hose connector and pull downward 10 Close the swing gate 11 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage CAUTION The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner Failure to follow this caution could damage the Free dom Top Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to instal lation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top NOTE The Torx fasteners that att
401. e or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission over heating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring 297 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOW EYE USAGE Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used to tow a disabled vehicle When using a tow eye be sure to follow the Tow Eye Usage Precautions and the Towing A Disabled Vehicle instructions in this section Tow Eye Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and secure in the mounting receptacle The tow eye is recommended for use with an approved tow bar and or rope Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed truck Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in this section for further information WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Do not use a chain with a tow eye Chains may break causing serious injury or death Do not
402. e this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly 43 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child Child Restrai
403. e to use equivalent replace ment tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have a collision Continued WARNING Continued resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can re sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve hicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a differ ent size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings 263 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommenda tions to guard against damage Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction
404. e vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Continued WARNING Continued Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 292 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from the stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn
405. ear window Two rear window roll up straps Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws two per side using a T30 Torx head driver 4 Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location NOTE To aid in disconnecting the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brack ets using a T30 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installation in this section Installing The Soft Top Two Door Models NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal Right and left door frames Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models Right and left quarter windows Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Th
406. eat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements OFF When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approxi mately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automati cally after approximately 30 minutes NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation exhaustion or other physical condi tion must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been o
407. ed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an el evated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 180 32 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this dis play shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For further informa tion refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center When the appropriate conditions exist this dis play shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer for further information COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on out side temperature compass direction and trip information It is locate
408. ed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position on an auto matic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allow ing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
409. eel Drive Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into NEU TRAL N automatic transmission must be in PARK and manual transmission must be in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recreational towing CAUTION DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Tow ing with only one set of wheels on the ground front or rear will cause severe transmission and or transfer case dam age Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground or OFF the ground using a ve hicle trailer Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing Continued CAUTION Continued Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the trans fer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Other wise internal damage will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case dam age Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing WARNING You or others could be inju
410. elect and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the informa tion on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel back ward counterclockwise to get to the track faster 195 In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device Preset 1 Playlists Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts Pushing a PRESET button will display the cur rent list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track push the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and push the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listi
411. en on the radio Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or push the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Push the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 device scan mode which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track push the SCAN button again During Scan mode pushing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pushing this button toggles be tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or push the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pushing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device Turning it clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is high lighted on the radio display push the TUNE control knob to s
412. end that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the autho rized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly Should this fail to resolve the problem con tact the manufacturer s distributor nearest to your location When you contact the distributor please pro vide all of the following information Your name address and phone number Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is available from a plate visible through the windshield in the upper corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side It is also available from your vehicle registration or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance Service history of your vehicle An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs 348 349 350 10 INDEX 351 About Your Brakes 239 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 175 239 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 321 Adding Fuel 274 Additives Fuel 273 Air bag 33 34 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag 34 Air bag Operation 35 Air Bag Warning Light 38 Enh
413. er T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or S Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 250 EXAMPLE 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loadin
414. er And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be consid ered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the drivers door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occu pants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then d
415. erable After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom mended that you take your vehicle to your local dealership to have your sensor func tion checked After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance nor to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s respon sibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire 266 Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres sure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the v
416. ering it CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also in creased water pressure may force past the weather strips Continued CAUTION Continued It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehi cle s interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper in stallation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these di rections 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust In stead use a microfiber towel or soft cot ton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching It removes fine scratches to im
417. es NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door frame tracks and slide the top forward 156 6 Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the short ened rail edge 157 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned cor rectly before pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers 12 To install the side windows affix the window temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 13 Insert the front
418. eting 26 Window Fogging 206 Windows 25 Power 25 Windshield Defroster 55 200 204 Windshield Washers 105 318 Fluid 318 Windshield Wiper Blades 315 Windshield Wipers 105 Windshield Folding 163 Wiper Blade Replacement 315 Wiper Rear 167 360 ESC ABS ERM Sentry Key N N Uconnect Sunrider
419. euvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 228 OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside 2 Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle 3 Remove the side step assembly The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Con trolling your vehicle is one of the keys to suc cessful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from yo
420. f cranking with the accel erator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting procedure With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disen gage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 214 Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater c
421. f striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen gers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued WARNING Continued It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued 29 WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one a
422. face 329 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When clean ing the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apar
423. fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the out side air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to pre vent fogging when the recirculation but ton is pushed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level The A C can be deselected manually with out disturbing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 200 Air Conditioning Control Push this button to en gage the Air Condition ing A light will illuminate when the Air Condition ing system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while ro tating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about ten seconds MAX A C For maximum cooling turn on the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system au tomatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the sys
424. front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle Window Lockout Switch Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models Gate Handle 26 NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempt ing to close the swing gate hard top models only CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Seat Belt Systems Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passen gers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 f a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints
425. fuel tank is full Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnos tic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or dam aged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recom mendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for tr
426. g After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for dam age Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness par ticularly on the chassis drivetrain compo nents steering and suspension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand wa ter or similar dirty conditions have the radia tor fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a colli sion If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Im pacted material can cause a wheel imbal an
427. g Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the pos sibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury 233 If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE VERSE Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should
428. g road conditions and posted speed limits 251 EXAMPLE Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire XL Extra load or reinforced tire or LL Light load tire or C D E F G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits 252 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 ABCD Code used by the tire manufa
429. g on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent ac cidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the con Continued WARNING Continued ditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one oper ating mode in 4L range Two wheel drive ve hicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range 4WD Models ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in ESC Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the 244 limited slip feature described in the TCS sec tion has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel
430. g too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi stage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deploy ment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passen ger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad vanced Front Air Bags WARNING No objects should be placed over or near the air b
431. gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for ser vice NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam com ing from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 289 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been re moved and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut
432. ge Indicator 187 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 201 Automatic Transaxle Interlock System 13 Automatic Transmission 216 324 326 Adding Fluid 326 Fluid and Filter Changes 326 Fluid Change 326 Fluid Level Check 325 Fluid Type 324 343 Special Additives 325 Autostick 220 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 110 Auxiliary Power Outlet 110 Axle Fluid 343 Axle Lock 227 B Pillar Location 254 Battery 311 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 18 Belts Seat 55 Body Mechanism Lubrication 315 Brake Assist System 240 Brake Control System Electronic 239 Brake Fluid 343 Brake System 239 323 Anti Lock ABS 239 Master Cylinder 324 Parking 237 Warning Light 174 239 Brake Transmission Interlock 216 Brakes
433. gether The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while the front or rear wheels are spinning at different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and cir cumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the trans fer case in the NEUTRAL N position with out first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disen gages both the front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is in PARK or manual transmission is in gear The parking brake should always be appl
434. gly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch 33 Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supple ment to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passen ger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compart ment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers WARNING Bein
435. gnition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accel erator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 247 NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously except for when the vehicle is started while in 4L Range The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light in dicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or full off Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in
436. h water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing dam age to your vehicle Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and respon sibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and 234 bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to deter mine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce th
437. h to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approximately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to deter mine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depending on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or roc
438. hesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows FUSES WARNING When replacing a blown fuse always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Continued WARNING Continued Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disen gaged If the replaced fuse blows again contact an authorized dealer If a general protection fuse for safety sys tems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gear box system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer 332 Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each compo nent is printed on the inside of the cover Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J1 J2 30 Amp Pink Transfer Case Module J3 J4 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Node J5 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green Anti Lock Brake System ABS Pump Stability Control System J7 30 Amp Pink
439. hicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure that the seats are fully latched 1 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2 under Fold And Tumble Rear Seat in this section 2 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull the seat out and away from the lower bracket 3 Remove the seat from the vehicle Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models Reverse the steps for removing the seat Rear Seat Release Folding Rear Seat Release Bar Location 98 WARNING To help protect against personal injury pas sengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily Remove the center head restraint Failure to do so will result in the head restraint com ing in contact with the center console WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
440. hifted into the 4L position NOTE When in 4WD the ESC Off Indicator Light will display in the instrument cluster Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the trans fer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neu tral Once the shift is completed place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however diffi culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause
441. hould not be less than 10 of the trailer load You must consider tongue load as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multi plied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjust able friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in ac cordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weig
442. ht dis tributing load equalizing hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 276 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Body Style Engine Transmission Axle Ratio Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 2 Door 3 6L Engine Manual 3 21 3 73 2 205 lbs 1 000 kg 110 lbs 50 kg Automatic 3 21 3 73 4 10 2 205 lbs 1 000 kg 110 lbs 50 kg 4 Door 3 6L Engine Automatic 3 21 2 205 lbs 1 000 kg 110 lbs 50 kg 3 73 4 10 4 409 lbs 2 000 kg 220 lbs 100 kg Manual 3 21 2 205 lbs 1 000 kg 110 lbs 50 kg 3 73 4 409 lbs 2 000 kg 220 lbs 100 kg 4 10 4 409 lbs 2 000 kg 220 lbs 100 kg When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10 or 220 lbs 100 kg whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph 100 km h or less NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be consid ered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for further information 277 Trail
443. ice for the vehicle Methanol Methyl is used in a variety of concentrations when blended with unleaded gasoline You may find fuels containing 3 or more methanol along with other alcohols called cosolvents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline are not the responsibility of the manu facturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 10 limit and or of receiving fuel with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be expected when using ethanol blended fuels due to the lower energy content of ethanol Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer CAUTION Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction start ing and operating difficulties and materials degradation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle 272 Clean Air Gasoline Many gasolines are now being blended that contribute to cleaner air e
444. ick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine brak ing on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially en gaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch NOTE During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the trans mission fluid warms up This is normal 221 Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds i
445. icle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to de activate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash to acknowledge the lock signal To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pushed after four seconds push the RKE transmitter LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the ignition key removed NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm a
446. ide of the vehicle during impacts that require SAB occupant protection In side impacts the SABs deploy indepen dently a left side impact deploys the left SAB only and a right side impact deploys the right side SAB only Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not SABs should have deployed The SABs will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment SABs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system SABs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including chil dren who are up against or very close to SABs can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SABs inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropri ate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from an inflating SAB To get the best protection from the SABs occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be prop Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Location 36 erly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING SABs need room to inflate Do not lean against the do
447. ied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and high way driving on hard surfaced roads 4H Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for further information 225 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pull ing power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION Exceeding 25 mph 40 km h while the trans fer case is engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed condition and engine damage The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is s
448. ific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number NOTE The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area If supported this number may be pro grammable on some systems To do this push the button and say Setup fol lowed by Emergency 71 The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency your mobile phone must be turned on paired to the Uconnect System and have network coverage Breakdown Service If Equipped If you need Breakdown service Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdown service number has to be se
449. il the track locks NOTE The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regard less of its original position The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic return ing of the seat to its sitting position Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear seats Driver s Seat Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback to its full forward position Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel Passenger Seat In addition to Easy Entry the front passenger seat is also equipped with Tip n Slide This feature allows for easier entry for rear passen gers Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Recline Lever Tip n Slide Easy Entry Lever 95 With the seat forward pull the entire seat as sembly toward the instrument panel Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passen ger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF h
450. ilters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement Gasoline Engine Follow the recommended maintenance inter vals as shown in the Service And Warranty Handbook 308 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1 Remove the bolts from the air cleaner intake tube 2 Remove air hose and loosen clean air hose clamp then release the spring clips on the air intake cover 3 Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 Spring Clips 2 Air Hose 3 Clean Air Hose Clamp 4 Clean Air Intake Tube Bolts 5 Air Cleaner Filter Cover 6 Clean Air Intake Tube Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 Spring Clips 2 Air Hose 3 Clean Air Hose Clamp Air Cleaner Air Hose 1 Air Filter Cleaner Cover 2 Air Hose 3 Clean Air Intake Tube 4 Clean Air Hose Clamp 5 Air Cleaner Filter 309 4 Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element 1 Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward 2 Install the air cleaner cover onto the hou
451. ing buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or push the VR button and say Next Track Center Console USB AUX Connector Port 194 Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR button and say Previous Track Jump backward in the current track by push ing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pushing and holding the FF gt gt button A single push backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respec tively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pushing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or push the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing push the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pushing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button push will go back to the play mode scre
452. ing windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hard ware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents Continued WARNING Continued If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to remov ing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 3 Remove the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with Uconnect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt 13 mm on top of the side bar NOTE Pull side bar out horizontally when removing 164 CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their
453. insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fas cia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance While operating in AUTO the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Pre ferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for de tails 202 203 Blower Control For full automatic opera tion or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off position the blower will shut off The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument pane
454. ints Child 40 Restraints Occupant 27 Rotation Tires 264 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 55 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 56 Safety Information Tire 249 Safety Tips 54 Safety Exhaust Gas 54 Schedule Maintenance 346 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 32 Energy Management Feature 33 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 31 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 32 Lap Shoulder Belts 29 Pregnant Women 33 Seat Belt Pretensioner 33 Seat Belt Reminder 28 Seat Belt System 27 Seat Belt Maintenance 330 Seat Belt Reminder 28 Seat Belts 28 55 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 32 Child Restraint 40 Front Seat 28 29 31 Inspection 55 Operating Instructions 31 Pregnant Women 33 Pretensioners 33 Rear Seat 29 Reminder
455. iper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm NOTE Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap 4 Still grasping the wiper blade move the wiper blade away from the wiper arm to disengage Installing The Rear Wiper 1 Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place 2 Install wiper assembly back on the wiper stud at it s original position and gently tighten nut 3 Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid res ervoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Arm 2 Wiper Blade Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 Wiper Arm 318 To
456. ipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspen sion components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing 301 Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEU TRAL N and the transmission is in PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for manual transmissions Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operat ing for detailed instructions CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case dam age Damage from improper towing is
457. ir bag system immediately Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be ser viced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer 39 Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain cra
458. ire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off Tire Rotation 265 The system will automatically update and the Tire
459. itch a second time to turn the light off The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery Headlight Leveling System If Equipped This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of vehicle load The headlight level ing switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To operate With the low beams on push the upper side or lower side of the headlight leveling switch until the appropriate number which cor responds to the load listed on the following chart illuminates on the switch NOTE Headlight Leveling will not activate when the parking lights or high beam headlights are on 0 Driver only or driver and front passenger 1 All seating positions occupied Sports Bar Reading Light Rear Cargo Light 104 2 All seating positions occupied plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment The total weight of passengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle 3 Driver plus an evenly distrib uted load in the luggage
460. itter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON posi tion extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not op erate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate from distances approxi mately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Push and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed the Illuminated Entry will initiate and the turn signal lights will flash twice Remote Key Unlock On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock eithe
461. ived as a high shift effort FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC WARNING Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully en gaged Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions 2H Two wheel drive high range 4H Four wheel drive high range N Neutral 4L Four wheel drive low range The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway con ditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driv ing Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Four Wheel Drive Shift Controls 224 Refer to Shifting Procedures in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked to
462. k ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the trans fer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Continued WARNING Continued Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Towing Requirements Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Re placing tires with a higher load carrying ca pacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause
463. ke pedal can result in abnormally high brake tempera tures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency 323 Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment how ever several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check sys tem for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the Continued WARNING Continued wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic mas ter cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed c
464. king the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody dam age Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill 232 Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to pro ceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all
465. l Latch Positions Four Door Models Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 45 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the f
466. l These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind shield This setting is good for maintaining com fort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual opera tion only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the out lets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button i
467. l for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service pur poses The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment NOTE Turn the black plastic wing nut counter clockwise to loosen the jack from the stor age bin Spare Tire Removal To remove the spare tire from the carrier re move the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 85 lbs 38 5 kg including the weight of the spare tire Jack Storage Jack Wing Nut 291 Preparations For Jacking 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE 5 Turn the ignition to LOCK 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking posi tion For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in th
468. l go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To partially open the window push halfway to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Power Window Switches 25 Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models The window lockout switch located between the front window switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls push the window lockout button downward To enable the window con trols push the window lockout button upward Rear Power Windows Four Door Models The rear passenger window switches are lo cated on the back of the center floor console Push the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the percep tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening REAR SWING GATE The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the
469. l is correctly established at 80 F 27 C it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Re member it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION If the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading Run the engine at idle in PARK to warm the fluid 8 Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely onto the four mounting studs 9 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dip stick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any rea son Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segre gated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leak age or wear use only the manufacturer s rec ommended brake fluid Refer to
470. lacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If the Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the Electronic Stability Program ESP be comes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 30 Sway Bar Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected 31 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is de tected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is plac
471. le lid has an integrated paper clip feature that can hold small items Rear Storage Compartment If Equipped The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage compartment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Open the rear compartment cover DUAL TOP TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the ve hicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen dently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top Two Door Models 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that con tain the following items Right and left door frames Four door frame attachment knobs Right and left quarter windows Center Console Lid Storage Rear Storage Cover 113 R
472. le speed NOTE A chime will sound once if the vehicle exceeds 120 km h 75 mph 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been activated 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for fur ther information 8 Turn Signal Indicators The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn sig nal lights when the turn signal lever is operated A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 173 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pres sure The light should turn on momen tarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause
473. less the side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle Continued 144 WARNING Continued The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remem ber always wear seat belts CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior Continued CAUTION Continued The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s inte rior NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 1 Remove the side windows 2 Remove the back window 145 NOTE Start zipper from the right side to remove back window 3 Release header latches from the windshield frame 4 Release the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle N
474. lluminates when manual compressor operation is selected 204 Recirculation Control The system will automatically con trol recirculation However press ing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Acti vating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fog ging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if this mode is selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recir culation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in de frost mode Attempting to use the recircu lation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Most of the time when in Automatic Opera tion you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recircul
475. maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 174 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 11 High Beam Indicator This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunc tion control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam
476. matic transmission into PARK manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical accessories Positive Battery Post 295 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could re sult in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Connecting The Jumper Cables 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the dis charged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground ex posed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery
477. matic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being re moved unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON RUN position and the brake pedal is depressed SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to pre vent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates 13 that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these condi tions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If th
478. may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat 48 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap con nect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child re straint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint rou
479. mentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position 38 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter mittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any en gine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Have an authorized dealer ser vice the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the a
480. move the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTBOARD SCREWS AT ANY TIME 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn coun terclockwise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local autho rized dealer 1 Remove the spare tire 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover Inboard Screw Location 340 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 3 6L Power 146 kW 5 000 RPM Torque 315 N m 4 000 RPM Maximum Vehicle Speed Consult your Salesperson NOTE A chime will sound if the vehicle speed exceeds 75 mph 120 km h It will continue to chime until the vehicle speed is reduced below 75 mph 120 km h FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Two Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate Four Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 1
481. mpty Timer Display Units Selection System Warnings Door Ajar etc Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Push and release the MENU but ton to advance the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features or to return to the Main Menu from a sub menu Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button push and release COMPASS Button Push and release the COMPASS button to return to the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Infor mation ECO screen whenever the current display is not the Compass Outside Temperature Audio Information ECO screen SELECT Button Push and release the SELECT but ton when prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu features with a reset capability or to change Per sonal Settings DOWN Button Push and release the DOWN but ton when prompted by the EVIC to step through stored system warn ing messages or Personal Settings features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Low Tire Pressure Low Fuel Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and O
482. n nection with both pins 5 and 7 281 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include a drive strat egy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the ve hicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmis sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for severe usage trailer towing police taxi etc Refer to the Service And Warranty Notebook for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing gasoline engine only AutoStick When using the AutoStick shift control se lect the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving
483. n MPH KM H Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 3 6L Accel 15 24 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 Cruise 10 16 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 NOTE Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progres sively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch Shift Pattern 222 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid CAUTION Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can dam age the engine and clutch systems Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage Continued CAUTION Continued When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage and or clutch damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch dam age are signifi
484. n sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top in this section 115 DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the ve hicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen dently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top Four Door Models 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that con tain the following items Right and left door frames Six door frame attachment knobs Right and left quarter windows Rear window Two rear window roll up straps Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Ensure the tether strap is secure to the pivot bracket Unbutton the side bow tether strap both sides 4 Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle slide the tether strap up the side bow both sides 5 The tether strap must be hooked
485. n snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall 259 If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec ommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states prohibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
486. n start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seri ously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunc tion particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe mal function could cause the converter to over heat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic converter will not require maintenance How ever it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 319 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs stop the
487. nce Refer to Compass Temperature Display in Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Automatic Compass Calibration in Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for more information SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Supplement Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer elec tronic audio device to the AUX port lo cated in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 193 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicles USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console Once the audio device is connected and syn chronized to the vehicles iPod USB MP3 con trol system iPod or external U
488. nd attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 133 Lowering The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 7 Check Strap 3 3 Bow 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 4 Sail Panel 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer 134 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 135 NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow the half door windows carefully out side of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the loops on the windshield 4 Open the swing gate 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets Unzip the rear window starting at the right lowe
489. nds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the origi nal road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres sure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module Tire Pressure Monitor Display 268 NOTE It is particularly important for you to regu larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS con sists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire as
490. nect Phone s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile mobile phone Uconnect Phone features Bluetooth tech nology the global standard that enables differ ent electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone al lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the Uconnect Phone at a time The Uconnect Phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel con trols if equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand button that will enable you to access the system When you push the button you will hear the word Uconnect fol lowed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command
491. nflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and Lo Tire message will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following sce narios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 267 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a match ing full size spare wheel and tire
492. ng ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Con trol System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitiga tion ERM Electronic Stability Control ESC Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Descent Control HDC All of these systems work to gether to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly in flated to produce accurate signals for the com puter WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regul
493. ng 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner 328 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle re paired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially alumi num and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vap
494. ng on your audio device CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Fol low the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further information on Bluetooth connectivity Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BTSA mode push either AUX button on the radio or push the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehi cle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played 196 Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Push the PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then s
495. ng temperature 4 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 5 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position allowing time for the transmis sion to fully engage in each position ending with the transmission in PARK 6 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and rein sert it until seated 7 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole The fluid level should be between the HOT upper refer ence holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill Use ONLY the specified fluid refer to Fluids Lubri 325 cants and Genuine Parts for fluid specifica tions After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole If it is necessary to check the transmis sion below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 80 F 27 C If the fluid leve
496. ng the vehicle HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped Vehicle must be on an 8 approximately or greater incline approximately 3 for manual transmission equipped vehicles Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a colli sion with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direc tion of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic transmission equipped vehicle and the activa tion criteria are met HSA will activate HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL 241 HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not recog nize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for
497. ng the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Transfer case 327 Selection Of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road sur faces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne con taminants road surfaces
498. nge of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle s speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very se vere or evasive driving maneuvers Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can only re duce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC for a complete expla nation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers espe cially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 243 Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the app
499. ngs 3 1 8 2 3 iPod 4 Gracenote AM 990 1 FM 98 7 FM AM LW MW SW FM AM 1 LW SW iPod 2 AUX SD SD Card USB Bluetooth AM 990 3 98 7 FM AM I didn t understand I didn t get that etc Uconnect Cancel Help Help Uconnect eh ah I would like to make a phone call
500. nic Roll Mitigation 243 Traction Control System 240 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 243 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 107 Electronic Stability Control ESC 244 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 180 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 181 185 Emergency Brake 237 Emergency In Case of Brake Warning Light 174 Jacking 290 Jump Starting 295 Engine Air Cleaner 308 Block Heater 215 Break In Recommendations 53 Compartment 305 Compartment Identification 305 Cooling 320 Exhaust Gas Caution 54 Fails to Start 214 Flooded Starting 214 Fuel Requirements 341 Jump Starting 295 Oil 307 341 Oil Change Interval 187 Oil Selection 341 Overheating 289 Starting 213 Temperature Gauge 176 Engine Oil Viscosity 308 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart
501. not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 302 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 305 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 306 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 306 REPLACEMENT PARTS 306 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 306 Engine Oil Gasoline Engine 307 Engine Oil Filter 308 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 308 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection 310 Maintenance Free Battery 311 Air Conditioner Maintenance 312 Body Lubrication 315 Windshield Wiper Blades 315 Adding Washer Fluid 318 Exhaust System 319 Cooling System 320 Brake System 323 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 324
502. nother in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the pos sibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the in side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoul der so that your stronges
503. nt Use any attachment method shown with an X Below LATCH Lower Anchors Only Seat Belt Only LATCH Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Seat Belt Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs 29 5 kg X X Rear Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs 29 5 kg X Forward Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs 29 5 kg X X Forward Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs 29 5 kg X 44 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages lo cated at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether an chorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Latch Positions Two Door Models Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbo
504. o Tire 24 20 15 75 75 24 15 TPMS TPMS Lo Tire 3 RF LR RR 3 LF Lo Tire 4 30 24 15 75 1 TPM 2 3 4
505. o perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfac tion discuss the matter with your authorized dealer or distributor s management Your authorized dealer or distributor will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of con trol Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not 4 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUB
506. o use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle NOTE The HSA system may also be turned on and off if the vehicle is equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Re fer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 242 HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK automatic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out manual transmission with wheels straight Apply parking brake on manual trans mission vehicle 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESC OFF switch four times within twenty seconds 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clockwise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of cha
507. of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the trac tion afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including Continued 240 WARNING Continued those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only remains pressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allow ing the vehicle to roll down the incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object To avoid this do not apply throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remem ber the driver is responsible for braki
508. ok entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a sepa rate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and sup ported by your phone Uconnect Phone auto matically downloads mobile phone s phone book Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can not be deleted or edited Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can
509. old the lighter in the heating position A second power outlet is located inside the center console and is powered directly from the vehicle battery CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War ranty On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer there is a third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area Front Power Outlet Rear Power Outlet If Equipped 110 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e mobile phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade battery life and or pre vent the engine from starting Continued CAUTION Continued
510. om eter pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condi tion checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several 175 typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as ref erenced above can reach higher tempera tures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 17 Coolant Temperature Warning Light This ligh
511. on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE MOPAR SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil or Shell Helix may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no Continued WARNING Continued one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious per sonal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner f
512. on placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never ex ceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never ex ceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 lb 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 lbs 68 kg 750 lbs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configu rations and number and size of occu pants This table is for illustration p
513. on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody pro tection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceedi
514. ondenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tight ness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the cool ant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these sys tems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer 320 If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant anti freeze conforming to MS 12106 Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic
515. ontainer Keep the master cylinder reser voir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Continued WARNING Continued Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor mance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid 324 NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in t
516. onto the pivot bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle both sides 116 6 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket bolts two per side from the sport bar using a 10 0 mm wrench or socket driver 7 Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket 8 Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location another person may be needed to help with this operation NOTE If you are doing this alone use one arm to hold the bundle up the other to remove the brackets 9 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installation in this section Installing The Soft Top Four Door Models NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal Right and left door frames Six door frame attachment knobs Right and left quarter windows Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the sport bar brackets lower the soft top into the sport bar bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft top 11
517. oor or lower ing a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle Opening The Sunrider 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 3 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top 4 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck 162 5 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 6 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle Closing The Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rear view mirror FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some acci dents The windshield also provides some pro tection against weather road debris and intru sion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the
518. or or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing com pounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely nec essary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any sur
519. or or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the SABs during deploy ment could cause you to be severely in jured or killed Relying on the SABs alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The SABs work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions SABs won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have SABs NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious to you but they will open during air bag deployment If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occu pants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not perma nent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a nor mal by product of the process that generates the non toxic g
520. ord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK WARNING It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a ve hicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK Continued 215 WARNING Continued turn the engine OFF and remove the igni
521. pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then push the button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations this is normal 72 Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could push the button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone num ber before you dial it Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations Prompts On Setup Confirma
522. perating Premium TPM System Graphic Display Damaged Key Key in Ignition Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 186 Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Key Fob Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Gate Ajar with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate back door open and A single chime Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for more details Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Gear Shift Indicator GSI If Equipped Up Shift Indicator Light Down Shift Indicator Light The Gear Shift Indicator GSI system is en abled on vehicles with a manual transmission or when a vehicle with an automatic transmis sion is in manual shift mode The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication when the recommended gear shift point has been reached This indication notifies
523. phone book previous redial select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up Primary Alternate s transfer call Uconnect Tutorial voice training work yes 81 VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you to control your AM FM radio disc player SD Card 8 4 only and USB iPod NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Com mand button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses I didn t understand I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command button while the
524. phragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odor less gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage Continued WARNING Continued and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 273 ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking gas cap is located on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle 1 Turn off engine 2 Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and turn the key one quarter turn to the right then rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove 3 Rotate the ignition key back to the left to remove 4 To replace the cap in
525. prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or work ing around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the under side or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for bro ken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen ger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system ca
526. protection these structural ele ments can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use 163 WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help pro tect against personal injury Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind shield is securely fastened either up or down Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the in structions for raising the windshield Make sure that the fold
527. pts confirmation continue delete dial download Dutch Nederlands edit emergency English delete all erase all Espanol Francais German Deutsch help home Italian Italiano language list names list phones main menu Return to main menu mobile mute mute off new entry no other Uconnect Phone Bluetooth Uconnect Phone Bluetooth OFF ACC ON 15 1 Send Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone
528. r This feature enhances off road perfor mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 213 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in
529. r a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 66 Dial By Saying A Number Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call For example you can say 151 1234 5555 The Uconnect
530. r corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 136 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner com pletely unzip the window 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the op posite side 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 137 12 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being in stalled To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 14 Completely release the latches from the loops on the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with the Sun rider package proceed to Step 15 15 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rear ward over the Sun
531. r of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to se cure the windshield in place 165 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the wind shield frame Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the lower side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 166 REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls the operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle two to three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is
532. r prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and RE VERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmis sion while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the ve hicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may re sult Revving the engin
533. r the driver s side or all doors and swing gate on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following steps 1 Push and hold the LOCK button on a pro grammed RKE transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter 16 2 Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then push and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will acti vate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to de activate the Vehicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps NOTE Pushing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will acti vate the Veh
534. r vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs that are located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats The SABs may help to reduce the risk 35 of occupant injury during certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction potential pro vided by the seat belts and body structure When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury SABs are designed to activate in certain side impacts The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the deployment of the SAB in a particular impact event is appro priate based on the severity and type of colli sion The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the SAB on the impact s
535. r window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 152 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner com pletely unzip the window 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the op posite side 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 153 12 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being in stalled To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 14 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top 15 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck 16 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 154 17 Release the side bows by pressing down on the la
536. ransmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will re quire more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmis sion The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may ad versely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your trans mission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Gasoline Engine It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature approximately 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Use the following procedure to check the trans mission fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Remove the engine cover by pulling it up off the mounting studs two in the front and two in the rear 3 Run the engine at idle speed and normal operati
537. re could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle s Service and Warranty Hand book is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose
538. re inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced ve hicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 258 Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Always use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be re paired if it meets the following criteria The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable The puncture is no greater than 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tir
539. red or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the trans fer case in the NEUTRAL N position with out first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disen gages both the front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is in PARK or manual transmission is in gear The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU TRAL N before recreational towing to pre vent damage to internal parts 284 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Press and hold the brake pedal 3 Shift the automatic transmission into NEU TRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission 4 Turn the engine OFF 5 Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL N 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle move ment 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans mission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear 10 Turn the engine OFF and leave the ignition switch in the unlocked ACC position 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in NEU TRAL CAUTION Damage
540. ree Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 114 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a T30 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward c Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets NOTE To aid in reattaching the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a T30 Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or overtighten CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instructio
541. requested but the specific name was not recog nized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system under stands two types of commands Universal com mands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Command button 83 Voice Tree 84 NOTE 1 You can replace AM with FM or if equipped you can say SW or LW 2 You can replace iPod with any of the player sources USB SD Card AUX or Bluetooth 3 You can replace 990 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 85 86 NOTE 1 You can replace 990 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM If the vehicle is equipped you can say commands for SW MW and LW frequencies as well 87 88 NOTE 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are
542. restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the seat belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether s
543. retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 158 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Vel cro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 159 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zip pers are properly started and aligned be fore zipping to prevent damage 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 19 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body channel 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position SUNRID
544. rider link to lock in the link Sunrider Models only 16 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider Models only 138 17 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps be tween the bows and as far inward as pos sible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 19 Close the front header latches 20 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information Raising The Soft Top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further infor mation 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 139 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails Sunrider Models only 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 7
545. rking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and pos sible injury or damage Continued Shift Lever 217 WARNING Continued Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a ve hicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the igni tion key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allow ing children to be in a vehicle unattended i
546. rmation Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury Always make sure that floor mats are prop erly attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Continued 55 WARNING Continued Never put floor mats or other floor cover ings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped un der the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be prop erly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installa tion or mo
547. ront passen ger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes 2 Door Model only Head restraints cannot be removed in the 4 Door model 46 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage symbols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion Locating The Tether Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback Latch Anchorages Two Door Models Latch Anchorages Four Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models 47 LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connec tor to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Two Door WARNI
548. ropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle main tain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel posi tion Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accel erator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions ESC cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns drivin
549. rs If Equipped 63 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 63 Vanity Mirrors 63 Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED 64 Operation 65 Phone Call Features 69 Uconnect Phone Features 71 Advanced Phone Connectivity 74 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 75 VOICE COMMAND 82 Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav 82 Uconnect Voice Commands 83 Voice Tree 84 57 SEATS 93 Front Seat Adjustment 93 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped 94 Front Seatback Recline 94 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models 94 Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models
550. rt from en tering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be in creased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintain ing correct ti
551. rtion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odom eter and radio when the parking lights or head lights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting Interior Lights The overhead light will come on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc tion lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Front Fog Light Switch Dimmer Control 103 Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc tion lever fully upward or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The sports bar reading lights available on four door models can be turned on by pressing the switches located on either side of the lens Press a sw
552. s below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation If Equipped The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h The TPMS will chime the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure values Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message in the EVIC but dashes will remain in place of the pressure values To reactivate the TPMS replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires equipped with TPM sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h The TPMS will chime the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then turn off and the
553. s located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo cated on the right side of the steering wheel NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed Tilt Steering Column Lever Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 3 SET 2 RES 4 CANCEL 107 To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Crui
554. s at or exceeding approximately 40 mph 64 km h the ESC goes into ESC Partial Off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system goes back to ESC Full Off ESC OFF Switch 245 To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore normal ESC On mode of operation The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is in ESC Partial Off and ESC full Off WARNING With the ESC in ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability fea tures offered by ESC and ERM are disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The ESC Full Off mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range 4WD Models ESC Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESC system will be in this mode In 4L range ESC and TCS except for the Brake Limited Differential BLD feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches an approximate speed of 40 mph 64 km h For speeds at or exceeding approxi mately 40 mph 64 km h the ESC goes into ESC Partial Off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system goes back to ESC Full Off The ESC is in ESC Full Off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so th
555. s dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain 218 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position dis play and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in
556. se Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control sys tem on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the RES button The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the RES button once will res
557. sert it into the filler neck and tighten to the right until at least three clicks are heard CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pres sure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Fuel Filler Cap 274 NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the
558. set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 109 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The front power outlet is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls and is powered from the ignition switch Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating ele ment do not h
559. sh or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pushing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash in vestigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the ve hicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR
560. shift lever is in NEU TRAL or PARK 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Push the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock sys tem To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system en gaged move the rocker lever rearward un locked position roll down
561. shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION Do not run a fabric top through an auto matic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Continued CAUTION Continued Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up un
562. sing assembly locating tabs 3 Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly and install air hose 4 Tighten air intake clamp and tighten air cleaner intake tube bolts Accessory Drive Belt Inspection WARNING Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch po sition You could be injured by the moving fan blades You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a ser vice job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Air Cleaner Filter 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface 310 When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib are considered normal These are not a reason to replace belt However cracks running along a rib not across are not normal Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear frayed cords or severe glazing Conditions that would require replacement Rib chunking one or more ribs has sepa rated from belt body Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt
563. specially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gasoline The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic ad ditive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufac turer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy re duce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and dia
564. splay a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five sec onds when a system fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SER VICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a match ing full size spare wheel and tire assem bly it has a tire pressure monitoring sen sor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light to be ON a chime to sound a LOW TIRE message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the Inflate to XX message and the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold 270 If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure moni
565. splays minutes sec onds After 59minutes 59seconds it displays hours minutes seconds 184 Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Push and release the right button on the instrument cluster to switch from odom eter to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Push and hold the right button while the odometer trip odom eter is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Compass Heading N S E W NE NW SE SW Outside Temperature F or C Digital Speedometer Vehicle Info ECO Display Fuel Economy Trip Display Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 185 Miles kilometers To E
566. straints Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Two Door Models Four Door Models 50 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Yes 2 Door Model only Head restraints cannot be removed in the 4 Door model Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its
567. sures Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pres sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded Example Tire Placard Location Door Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar 254 For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Informati
568. system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options 82 NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak com mands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was
569. t be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 70 Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF Call continu ation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types 1 After the ignition is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone ei ther until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone 2 After the ignition is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is auto matically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone 3 An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French Ger man Italian or Spanish if so equipped Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language spec
570. t bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protec tion Inspect the seat belt system periodi cally checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision 30 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the web bing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug
571. t display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows Hours Minutes Seconds Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START System Status Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored Pushing and releas ing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored Pushing and releas ing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARN INGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button push Push and release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu 191 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Push and release the MENU button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the
572. t in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically check ing for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retrac tor torn webbing etc Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precau tions Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top al ways make sure it is completely dry before lowering Be especially careful when washing the win dows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Windows 330 Washing Use MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top from underneath Rinsing Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before low
573. t overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concen tration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type thermo stat Other designs may result in unsatisfac tory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in spected periodically Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the bra
574. t warns of an overheated en gine condition If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off imme diately and call for service NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool 18 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on 19 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear drive shafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 20 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arm ing and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 21 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather
575. tch above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to disengage Re peat this step on the other side 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear door frame 19 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track and lower the top down into the vehicle NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation 20 Tuck the fabric and the check straps be tween the bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 155 21 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body 22 Close the front header latches 23 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further infor mation 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door fram
576. te the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when in stalling an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attach ing other items or equipment to the ve hicle 49 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not nec essary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retrac tor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode descrip tion under Occupant Re
577. ted by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over speed Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an automatic downshift for im proved acceleration when reasonable The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lug ging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in sec ond gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged NOTE When the transfer case is in the 4L Low range the transmission will shift automati cally but no higher than the displayed gear To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoSt
578. teering Column 107 Tip Start 213 Tire and Loading Information Placard 254 Tire Markings 249 Tire Safety Information 249 Tires 56 257 Aging Life of Tires 262 Air Pressure 257 Chains 264 Changing 290 Compact Spare 260 General Information 257 High Speed 258 Inflation Pressures 258 Jacking 290 293 Life of Tires 262 Load Capacity 254 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 265 Pressure Warning Light 179 Radial 259 Replacement 263 Rotation 264 Safety 249 257 Sizes 250 Snow Tires 259 Spare Tire 291 Spinning 262 Tread Wear Indicators 262 To Open Hood 100 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 278 Towing 275 300 Disable
579. tem is quite simple Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only Temperature Control Dial in the temperature you would like the sys tem to maintain by rotat ing the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating sys tem Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automati cally Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake Automatic Temperature Control 201 The recommended setting for maximum com fort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
580. terclockwise until they can be removed 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center of the roof panel 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoulder belt anchorage 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 Freedom Top Storage Bag Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modu lar Hard Top come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Free dom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat 120 Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward Unfold the black panel divider ensure the di vider is laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the divider Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing upward NOTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag through the loops 1
581. that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Service and Warranty Handbook there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 306 CAUTION Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Gasoline Engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine has been shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Alw
582. the driver that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption When the up shift indicator is shown on the display the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear When the down shift indicator is shown on the display the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower gear The GSI indicator remains illuminated until the driver changes gear or the driving conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not required to improve fuel consumption Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Re quired message will display in the EVIC display for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluc tuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message tem porarily push and release the MENU button 187 To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance per form the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator
583. the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Rely ing too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another ve hicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a ve hicle seen in the passenger side mirror Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Rearview Mirror 62 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution di rectly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate con trols A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or i
584. the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds This mes sage is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also di
585. the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off 248 When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corre sponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph 1 5 km h 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 5 km h 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h However the driver can override HDC opera tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC control the accel erator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further informa tion 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled If the ESC senses that the brakes are overheating the
586. this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a colli sion CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Dis abled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically up shifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operat ing conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and exten
587. tically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic mode Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 101 Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur ther information Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE
588. tion describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service If the transmission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section Shift Lever Override Access Cover 300 Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS Flat Tow NONE See instructions under Recreational Towing Automatic Transmission in PARK Manual Transmission in gear NOT in Neutral Transfer Case in NEUTRAL Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equipment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bum pers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers de frosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equ
589. tion key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allow ing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds
590. tions Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone key pad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicles audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect
591. to the Uconnect Phone For example after you start the vehicle Maximum of 2000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently con nected mobile phone is accessible Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile phones SIM card phonebook is downloaded This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection 67 Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebo
592. toring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will re main ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display the Inflate to XX message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five sec onds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure i
593. torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle load ing In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applica tions Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform sat isfactorily in off road conditions If at all pos sible avoid sharp turns or abrupt man
594. transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully en gaged 226 AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instru ment panel to the left of the steering column This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec tronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column
595. trap under the head restraint and be tween the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child re straint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 52 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and pos sible injury to the child Use only the an chorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration
596. tup before using To setup push the button and say Setup Breakdown Ser vice and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an au tomated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate re sponse selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can push the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can push the button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of num bers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer ser vice center menu structure and to leave a number on a
597. ual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally 286 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 289 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 289 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 290 Torque Specifications 290 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 290 Jack Location 291 Spare Tire Removal 291 Preparations For Jacking 292 Jacking Instructions 292 Road Tire Installation 294 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 295 Preparations For Jump Start 295 Jump Starting Procedure 296 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 297 TOW EYE USAGE 298 Front Tow Eye Installation 299 Rear Tow Eye Installation 299 287 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
598. uld not be towed Rear Tow Eye Installation The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a door on the rear bumper fascia To install the tow eye open the door using the vehicle key or a small screwdriver and thread the tow eye into the receptacle Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the tow eye and tighten refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in Section 6 for information The tow eye must be fully seated to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as shown If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching bracket the vehicle should not be towed Tow Eye Warning Label 299 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever can not be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the shift lever override access cover located to the right of the shift lever 4 Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON RUN position but do not start the engine 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port and push and hold the override release lever down 7 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL posi tion 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This sec
599. ult in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the but ton is released then the new set speed will be established 108 Metric Speed km h Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the but ton is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can decrease speed by pushing the SET button The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subse quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed km h Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each sub sequent tap of the button results in a de crease of 1 km h If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new
600. unlock the doors WARNING For personal security reasons and safety in a collision lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of rea sons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear se lector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil dren A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed ex ceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in your radio Power Door Lock Switch 23 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit If Equipped The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit fea ture is enabled 2 The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission
601. unting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal opera tion causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately 56 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS 62 Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 62 Outside Mirrors 62 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 63 Power Mirro
602. up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 176 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the tempera ture gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air condi tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look un der the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 22 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 23 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear po sition of the automatic transmission 24
603. ur poses only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 255 256 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Over loading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping dis tance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy Tread Wear Ride Comfort Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail sud denly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with e
604. ur vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation Bodyside Nut Underside Bolt 229 When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud steep inclines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range CAUTION Do not use 4L Low range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hard ware damage can result Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pres sure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway
605. urer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright 2014 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also ap pears underbody on the right side of the frame
606. uring the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Service And Warranty Handbook Refer to Service And Warranty Handbook for the proper main tenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Fol low these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision Continued 278 WARNING Continued When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the par
607. urned to the OFF position Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Unlock the doors automatically System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re sponse System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC monitors the in ternal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either mo
608. urns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Program ming Menus 2 Push the MENU button until Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features displays in the EVIC 3 Push the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Push and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To com pensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the com pass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate com pass heading NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel this is where
609. vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service includ ing a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunction ing operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam com ing from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protec tion every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the en gine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant antifreeze Check the front of the A C con denser if equipped or radiator for any accumu lation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose ver tically down the face of the A C c
610. verheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Tip n Slide 96 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the ve hicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Rear Head Restraints 2 Door Model The rear seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints To raise the head restraint pull up ward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Refer to Oc cupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing Rear Head Restraints 4 Door Model The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable
611. work and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connec tion to the Uconnect Phone When this hap pens the connection can generally be reestab lished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a lan guage change you must wait at least 15 sec onds prior to using the system 76 77 78 79 Voice Commands Primary Alternate s zero one two three four five six seven eight nine asterisk star Primary Alternate s plus hash all all of them Breakdown service call cancel confirmation prompts confirmation continue delete dial download Primary Alternate s Dutch Nederlands edit emergency English delete all erase all Espanol Francais German Deutsch help home Italian Italiano language 80 Primary Alternate s list names list phones main menu return to main menu mobile mute mute off new entry no other Primary Alternate s pair a phone phone pairing pairing phonebook
612. xt two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also push the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Push the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also push the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete 74 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect Phone features push the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the Uconnect Phone recognizing their voice com mands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training fe
613. y a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu nity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard lo cated on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 261 Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A ti
614. zed dealer Customer Key Programming See your authorized dealer if you require re placement or additional keys for your vehicle General Information The Sentry Key operates on a carrier fre quency of 433 92 MHz The Sentry Key Im mobilizer system is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interfer ence This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 14 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors hood swing gate and ignition for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will sound the horn intermittently the headlights will turn on flash the turn signal lights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after 29 seconds and turn off all of the visual signals after an additional 31 seconds then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and swing gate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lo
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search